Перевод: со всех языков на английский

с английского на все языки

according to one of the witnesses

  • 1 presente

    adj.
    1 present.
    siempre está presente en mí su recuerdo her memory is always present in my mind
    aquí presente here present
    hacer presente algo a alguien to notify somebody of something
    ¡presente! present!
    Carlos Muñoz — ¡presente! Carlos Muñoz — present! (al pasar lista)
    2 current.
    del presente mes of this month
    intj.
    present, here.
    m.
    1 present (gen) & (grammar).
    presente histórico historical present
    2 gift, present (regalo).
    3 attendee, person who is present.
    pres.subj.
    3rd person singular (él/ella/ello) Present Subjunctive of Spanish verb: presentar.
    * * *
    1 present
    1 (tiempo) present
    2 LINGÚÍSTICA present tense
    3 (obsequio) gift
    1 those present
    \
    mejorando lo presente present company excepted
    por el presente for the moment
    por la presente... (en cartas) hereby
    tener presente to bear in mind
    presente histórico present historic
    * * *
    1. noun m.
    2) gift
    2. adj.
    * * *
    1. ADJ
    1) [en el espacio]

    -¡Miguel García! -¡presente! — "Miguel García!" - "here!"

    estar presente — to be present

    ¿estabas tú presente en esa reunión? — were you present at that meeting?

    esa posibilidad está siempre presente — there is always that possibility, that possibility always exists

    hacerse presente — to manifest o.s.

    tener algo presente — to bear sth in mind

    siempre os tendré presentes en mis pensamientos — you will always be in my thoughts, I will never forget you

    es muy buena actriz, mejorando lo presente — she's a very good actress, as you are yourself o just like you

    cuerpo 2)
    2) [en el tiempo] [año, mes, temporada] current; [momento] present
    3) LAm [en sobre]

    "presente" — "by hand"

    2.
    SMF

    los/las presentes — those present

    3. SM
    1) (tb: momento presente) present
    2) (Ling) present, present tense
    participio
    3) (=regalo) present, gift
    4.
    SF frm

    le comunico por la presente que... — I hereby inform you that... frm

    * * *
    I
    1) ( en un lugar) present

    Juan Prado - presente! — ( al pasar lista) Juan Prado - present o here!

    Presente — (CS) (Corresp) ≈ by hand

    hacerle presente a alguien — (frml) to notify somebody (frml)

    mejorando lo presente: es muy inteligente, mejorando lo presente he's very intelligent, as indeed are you; tener algo presente to bear something in mind; tener presente a alguien — to think of somebody, remember somebody

    2) ( actual) present

    el día 15 del presente mes — the 15th of this month, the 15th inst. (frml)

    en su atenta carta del 3 presente — (Méx frml) (Corresp) in your letter of the 3rd of this month o (frml) of the 3rd inst.

    el presente documento/contrato — (frml) (Corresp) this document/contract; ver tb presente III

    II
    1)
    b) (Ling) present (tense)
    2) los presentes masculino plural, las presentes femenino plural ( asistentes) those present
    3) ( regalo) gift, present
    III
    femenino (frml)

    por la presente me complace informarle que... — I am pleased to inform you that... (frml)

    por la presente pongo en su conocimiento que... — I am writing to inform you that... (frml)

    * * *
    I
    1) ( en un lugar) present

    Juan Prado - presente! — ( al pasar lista) Juan Prado - present o here!

    Presente — (CS) (Corresp) ≈ by hand

    hacerle presente a alguien — (frml) to notify somebody (frml)

    mejorando lo presente: es muy inteligente, mejorando lo presente he's very intelligent, as indeed are you; tener algo presente to bear something in mind; tener presente a alguien — to think of somebody, remember somebody

    2) ( actual) present

    el día 15 del presente mes — the 15th of this month, the 15th inst. (frml)

    en su atenta carta del 3 presente — (Méx frml) (Corresp) in your letter of the 3rd of this month o (frml) of the 3rd inst.

    el presente documento/contrato — (frml) (Corresp) this document/contract; ver tb presente III

    II
    1)
    b) (Ling) present (tense)
    2) los presentes masculino plural, las presentes femenino plural ( asistentes) those present
    3) ( regalo) gift, present
    III
    femenino (frml)

    por la presente me complace informarle que... — I am pleased to inform you that... (frml)

    por la presente pongo en su conocimiento que... — I am writing to inform you that... (frml)

    * * *
    el presente
    (n.) = present, the, immediate time

    Ex: While the reading habits of the elite form the leading edge of intellectual thought, the vast majority of humanity have had, in the past as well as the present, different habits and aims.

    Ex: And so, from its hardscrabble beginnings to immediate time, Wexler has lead a varied existence, changing from shipping point for fruit to resting place for travelers = Y por lo tanto, desde sus comienzos difíciles hasta el presente, Wexler ha llevado una vida variada, pasando de ser un centro de recepción y envío de fruta a un lugar de descanso para los viajeros.

    presente1
    1 = present.

    Ex: We are going to use the data elements defined in the present document as a base from which to begin.

    * desde + Expresión Temporal + hasta el presente = from + Expresión Temporal + up to the present.
    * el presente = thisness.
    * hacer hasta la presente = do + all along.
    * hasta el presente = until now, so far, up to now, to this day, as of this time, as of now, as of today, to date.
    * hasta la presente = to this day, as of this time, as of now, as of today, to date, so far, up to now.
    * orientado al presente = now-oriented.
    * por la presente = hereby.
    * preocupado por el presente = present-minded.
    * presente, el = present, the, immediate time.

    presente2
    2 = at work, attendant.

    Ex: Determining costs has proven difficult for many libraries involved in a recon project as there are so many variables at work.

    Ex: Quite obviously, as most children spend their infant years aware of very few people, usually members of their family, it is from them -- parents, brothers and sisters, attendant relatives and friends -- that they learn the primary adaptive lessons.
    * estar presente = be manifest, be present.
    * mantener presente = keep before.
    * no estar presente en = be absent (from).
    * no tener presente = be oblivious of/to.
    * omnipresente = ever-present.
    * tener presente = be mindful of/that, bear in + mind, consider (as), keep in + focus, keep in + mind, make + consideration, mind, make + provision for, have + regard for, be aware of.
    * tener presente las posibilidades de Algo = consider + possibilities.
    * téngase presente = witness.
    * teniendo esto presente = with this/that in mind.

    presente3
    3 = gift.

    Ex: That is the great gift literature can give one.

    * * *
    A (en un lugar) present
    no estuve presente en la reunión I wasn't present at the meeting
    el mineral estaba presente en cuatro de las muestras analizadas the mineral was found in four of the samples analyzed
    Juan Prado — ¡presente! (al pasar lista) Juan Prado — present o here!
    la guerra civil está presente en todas sus novelas the civil war is a constant feature in her novels
    [ S ] Presente (CS) ( Corresp) ≈ by hand
    hacerle presente a algn ( frml); to notify sb ( frml)
    me complace hacerle presente que su solicitud ha sido aceptada I am pleased to notify o inform you that your application has been accepted
    mejorando lo presente: es muy inteligente, mejorando lo presente he's very intelligent, as indeed are you
    tu hermana es muy simpática, mejorando lo presente your sister's very nice, just like you, your sister's very nice, it must run in the family
    tener algo presente to bear sth in mind
    tendré presente tu propuesta I'll bear your proposal in mind
    tengo siempre presentes sus consejos I always remember o bear in mind his advice
    tener presente a algn to think of sb, remember sb
    te tengo presente en mis oraciones I remember you in my prayers
    B (actual) present
    hasta el momento presente no hemos tenido noticias suyas up to the present time we have had no news of him
    a finales del presente año at the end of the current o present year
    el día 15 del presente mes the 15th of this month, the 15th inst. ( frml)
    en su atenta carta del 3 presente ( Méx frml) ( Corresp) in your letter of the 3rd of this month o ( frml) of the 3rd inst.
    el presente documento/contrato ( frml) ( Corresp) this document/contract
    ver tb presente3 (↑ presente (3))
    A
    1
    (en el tiempo): el presente the present
    2 ( Ling) present tense, present
    entre los presentes estaba el obispo among those present was the bishop
    los presentes permanecieron en silencio everyone there o those present remained silent
    ( frml)
    por la presente me complace informarle que … I am pleased to inform you that … ( frml)
    por la presente pongo en su conocimiento que … I am writing to inform you that … ( frml)
    los firmantes de la presente queremos expresar … we the undersigned wish to express … ( frml)
    * * *

     

    Del verbo presentar: ( conjugate presentar)

    presenté es:

    1ª persona singular (yo) pretérito indicativo

    presente es:

    1ª persona singular (yo) presente subjuntivo

    3ª persona singular (él/ella/usted) presente subjuntivo

    3ª persona singular (él/ella/usted) imperativo

    Multiple Entries:
    presentar    
    presente
    presentar ( conjugate presentar) verbo transitivo
    1

    b) ( exponer por primera vez) ‹libro/disco to launch;

    obra de arte to present;
    colección de moda to present, exhibit
    c) ( entregar) ‹informe/solicitud to submit;

    trabajo to hand in;
    renuncia to hand in, submit
    d) ( enseñar) ‹carnet/pasaporte to show

    e)disculpas/excusas to make;

    queja to file, make;
    cargos to bring;

    presente pruebas to present evidence
    f) (Mil):


    2 (TV) ‹ programa to present, introduce
    3 persona to introduce;

    4novedad/ventaja to offer;
    síntoma to show
    presentarse verbo pronominal
    1


    b) presentese a algo ‹ a examen to take sth;

    a concurso to enter sth;
    a elecciones› to take part in sth;
    se presenta como candidato independiente he's running (AmE) o (BrE) he's standing as an independent;

    presentese para un cargo to apply for a post
    2 [dificultad/problema] to arise, come up;
    [ oportunidad] to arise
    3 ( darse a conocer) to introduce oneself
    presente adjetivo
    1 ( en un lugar) [estar] present;
    ( on signs) Presente (CS) (Corresp) ≈ by hand;
    tener algo presente to bear sth in mind

    2 ( actual) present;

    el día 15 del presente mes the 15th of this month;
    en su atenta carta del 3 presente (Méx frml) (Corresp) in your letter of the 3rd of this month o (frml) of the 3rd inst.
    ■ sustantivo masculino
    1


    b) (Ling) present (tense)

    2
    los presentes sustantivo masculino plural ( asistentes) those present

    presentar verbo transitivo
    1 (un programa, pruebas, etc) to present
    2 (un producto) to launch
    3 (a una persona) to introduce
    4 (síntomas, características, etc) to have, show
    5 (disculpas) to give, present
    (condolencias) to give, pay
    6 (la dimisión) to hand in
    7 (una queja) to file, make
    presente
    I adjetivo
    1 (en un lugar) present: el personal presente puede votar, the staff here can vote
    2 (en el tiempo) present
    el presente año, the current year
    II sustantivo masculino
    1 (regalo) gift, present
    2 Ling present tense
    ♦ Locuciones: hacer presente, to declare, state
    tener presente, to bear in mind
    ' presente' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    corriente
    - cuerpo
    - deber
    - duplicado
    - poder
    - respeto
    - sala
    - soler
    - tener
    - ya
    - actualidad
    - ahora
    - asistir
    - ausente
    - indicativo
    - misa
    English:
    attend
    - be
    - bear
    - hereby
    - innocent
    - likelihood
    - mind
    - must
    - now
    - opportunity
    - present
    - attendance
    - certify
    - introduce
    - live
    - time
    * * *
    adj
    1. [asistente, que está delante] present;
    yo estuve presente el día que hicieron la reunión I was present on the day of the meeting;
    siempre está presente en mí su recuerdo her memory is always present in my mind;
    aquí presente here present;
    hacer presente algo a alguien to notify sb of sth;
    tener presente [recordar] to remember;
    [tener en cuenta] to bear in mind;
    lo tenemos presente en nuestros ruegos we remember him in our prayers;
    ten presente que acaba de salir del hospital bear in mind that she has just left hospital;
    Carlos Muñoz – ¡presente! [al pasar lista] Carlos Muñoz – present!;
    mejorando lo presente: es muy guapa, mejorando lo presente she's very pretty, though not as pretty as you;
    todos los hombres son idiotas, mejorando lo presente all men are stupid, present company excepted
    2. [en curso] current;
    del presente mes of this month;
    en las presentes circunstancias es mejor no decir nada in the present circumstances it is best to say nothing
    nmf
    [en un lugar]
    los/las (aquí) presentes everyone present;
    invitó a los presentes a acudir a la próxima reunión he invited everyone present to attend the next meeting
    nm
    1. [tiempo actual] present;
    2. Gram present
    presente histórico historical present;
    presente de indicativo present indicative;
    presente de subjuntivo present subjunctive
    3. [regalo] gift, present
    4. [corriente]
    el presente [mes] the current month;
    [año] the current year
    nf
    [escrito]
    por la presente le informo… I hereby inform you…;
    por la presente se le comunica su nombramiento como tesorero I am writing to inform you that you have been appointed treasurer
    * * *
    I adj present;
    en el caso presente in the present case o situation;
    tener algo presente bear sth in mind;
    ¡presente! here!;
    mejorando lo presente just like you
    II m tiempo present
    III m/f
    :
    los presentes those present
    IV f
    :
    por la presente le informamos que … we hereby wish to inform you that …
    * * *
    1) : present, in attendance
    2) : present, current
    3)
    tener presente : to keep in mind
    1) : present (time, tense)
    2) : one present
    entre los presentes se encontraban...: those present included...
    * * *
    presente adj n present

    Spanish-English dictionary > presente

  • 2 תנאי

    תְּנַאי, תְּנַּייm. (תָּנָה) (alternative,) stipulation, condition, agreement. Keth.19b ת׳ היו דברינו if witnesses say, the transaction to which we have testified was made dependent on a (verbal) condition (and we do not know that it has been fulfilled). Ib. או דילמא ת׳ מילתאוכ׳ or is a statement concerning a condition something different (from a statement concerning a trust, v. אְמָנָה)? Ib. עד אחד אומר ת׳ … אינו ת׳ if one of the witnesses says, there was a condition, and the other says, there was none. Kidd.III, 4 כל ת׳ שאינו … אינו ת׳ a stipulation of conditions which is not like the stipulations concerning the sons of Gad and Reuben (stating both alternatives, Num. 32:20–23;) is not valid. Ib. 61a, sq. ת׳ כפול a double stipulation, an agreement stating both alternatives and their eventual consequences. Gitt.75a ת׳ קודם למעשה the condition (in the agreement) preceding the act (e. g. ‘if such and such a thing is done, this shall be thy letter of divorce, not, ‘this shall be thy letter of divorce, if such and such a thing is done). Ib. ת׳ בדבר אחד ומעשהוכ׳ if the condition concerns one thing, and the consequence another thing (e. g. if you go with your brethren to conquer, you shall have the trans-Jordanic lands); ib. b הכא דת׳ ומעשה בדבר אחד whereas in this case (‘this shall be thy letter of divorce on condition that thou wilt return to me the paper on which the letter of divorce is written) condition and consequence concern the same thing. Keth.IX, 1 כל המתנה … תְּנָאוֹ בטל if one makes a stipulation which is contrary to what is written in the Torah, his stipulation is void; Y. ib. 32d bot. בת׳ גוף אבל בת׳ ממוןוכ׳ this refers only to a condition concerning ones person (personal rights or duties), but as to a condition concerning money (monetary rights or claims), the agreement (waiving the claim) is valid; Y.Kidd.I, 59c תניי גוף; ib. תְּנָייוֹ. Ib. ת׳ אפשר … בסופו a condition which he may finally fulfill (depending upon himself). Ex. R. s. 21, v. infra; a. fr.Pl. תְּנָאִים, תְּנָאִין, תְּנָיִים, תְּנָיִין. Y.B. Bath.V.beg.15a כתְנָאֵי יהושוע; B. Kam.80b a. e., v. יְהוֹשוּעַ. Gen. R. s. 5 ת׳ התנההקב״הוכ׳ the Lord (at creation) made stipulations with the sea, that it should be divided before Israel, as it is written (Ex. 14:27), ‘and the sea returned … to its former condition (לְאֵיתָנוֹ), לת׳ שהתנה עמו to the stipulations which ; Ex. R. s. 21 לתְנָאוֹ שהתניתי עמו to the condition which I stipulated with it. Y.Sot.VII, beg.21b כת׳ שבלבינו לא כת׳וכ׳ (we administer the oath to thee) according to the conditions in our mind, not according to the conditions (mental reservations) in thy mind. Ib. שלא יאמרו יש ת׳ לשבועות that people should not say, mental reservations in oaths are permissible. Y.Kidd.I, 58c בתניים שבו קידש he betrothed her by the stipulations in the document (although the material on which it was written was forbidden for use), opp. בגופו with the object itself; a. fr.

    Jewish literature > תנאי

  • 3 תניי

    תְּנַאי, תְּנַּייm. (תָּנָה) (alternative,) stipulation, condition, agreement. Keth.19b ת׳ היו דברינו if witnesses say, the transaction to which we have testified was made dependent on a (verbal) condition (and we do not know that it has been fulfilled). Ib. או דילמא ת׳ מילתאוכ׳ or is a statement concerning a condition something different (from a statement concerning a trust, v. אְמָנָה)? Ib. עד אחד אומר ת׳ … אינו ת׳ if one of the witnesses says, there was a condition, and the other says, there was none. Kidd.III, 4 כל ת׳ שאינו … אינו ת׳ a stipulation of conditions which is not like the stipulations concerning the sons of Gad and Reuben (stating both alternatives, Num. 32:20–23;) is not valid. Ib. 61a, sq. ת׳ כפול a double stipulation, an agreement stating both alternatives and their eventual consequences. Gitt.75a ת׳ קודם למעשה the condition (in the agreement) preceding the act (e. g. ‘if such and such a thing is done, this shall be thy letter of divorce, not, ‘this shall be thy letter of divorce, if such and such a thing is done). Ib. ת׳ בדבר אחד ומעשהוכ׳ if the condition concerns one thing, and the consequence another thing (e. g. if you go with your brethren to conquer, you shall have the trans-Jordanic lands); ib. b הכא דת׳ ומעשה בדבר אחד whereas in this case (‘this shall be thy letter of divorce on condition that thou wilt return to me the paper on which the letter of divorce is written) condition and consequence concern the same thing. Keth.IX, 1 כל המתנה … תְּנָאוֹ בטל if one makes a stipulation which is contrary to what is written in the Torah, his stipulation is void; Y. ib. 32d bot. בת׳ גוף אבל בת׳ ממוןוכ׳ this refers only to a condition concerning ones person (personal rights or duties), but as to a condition concerning money (monetary rights or claims), the agreement (waiving the claim) is valid; Y.Kidd.I, 59c תניי גוף; ib. תְּנָייוֹ. Ib. ת׳ אפשר … בסופו a condition which he may finally fulfill (depending upon himself). Ex. R. s. 21, v. infra; a. fr.Pl. תְּנָאִים, תְּנָאִין, תְּנָיִים, תְּנָיִין. Y.B. Bath.V.beg.15a כתְנָאֵי יהושוע; B. Kam.80b a. e., v. יְהוֹשוּעַ. Gen. R. s. 5 ת׳ התנההקב״הוכ׳ the Lord (at creation) made stipulations with the sea, that it should be divided before Israel, as it is written (Ex. 14:27), ‘and the sea returned … to its former condition (לְאֵיתָנוֹ), לת׳ שהתנה עמו to the stipulations which ; Ex. R. s. 21 לתְנָאוֹ שהתניתי עמו to the condition which I stipulated with it. Y.Sot.VII, beg.21b כת׳ שבלבינו לא כת׳וכ׳ (we administer the oath to thee) according to the conditions in our mind, not according to the conditions (mental reservations) in thy mind. Ib. שלא יאמרו יש ת׳ לשבועות that people should not say, mental reservations in oaths are permissible. Y.Kidd.I, 58c בתניים שבו קידש he betrothed her by the stipulations in the document (although the material on which it was written was forbidden for use), opp. בגופו with the object itself; a. fr.

    Jewish literature > תניי

  • 4 תְּנַאי

    תְּנַאי, תְּנַּייm. (תָּנָה) (alternative,) stipulation, condition, agreement. Keth.19b ת׳ היו דברינו if witnesses say, the transaction to which we have testified was made dependent on a (verbal) condition (and we do not know that it has been fulfilled). Ib. או דילמא ת׳ מילתאוכ׳ or is a statement concerning a condition something different (from a statement concerning a trust, v. אְמָנָה)? Ib. עד אחד אומר ת׳ … אינו ת׳ if one of the witnesses says, there was a condition, and the other says, there was none. Kidd.III, 4 כל ת׳ שאינו … אינו ת׳ a stipulation of conditions which is not like the stipulations concerning the sons of Gad and Reuben (stating both alternatives, Num. 32:20–23;) is not valid. Ib. 61a, sq. ת׳ כפול a double stipulation, an agreement stating both alternatives and their eventual consequences. Gitt.75a ת׳ קודם למעשה the condition (in the agreement) preceding the act (e. g. ‘if such and such a thing is done, this shall be thy letter of divorce, not, ‘this shall be thy letter of divorce, if such and such a thing is done). Ib. ת׳ בדבר אחד ומעשהוכ׳ if the condition concerns one thing, and the consequence another thing (e. g. if you go with your brethren to conquer, you shall have the trans-Jordanic lands); ib. b הכא דת׳ ומעשה בדבר אחד whereas in this case (‘this shall be thy letter of divorce on condition that thou wilt return to me the paper on which the letter of divorce is written) condition and consequence concern the same thing. Keth.IX, 1 כל המתנה … תְּנָאוֹ בטל if one makes a stipulation which is contrary to what is written in the Torah, his stipulation is void; Y. ib. 32d bot. בת׳ גוף אבל בת׳ ממוןוכ׳ this refers only to a condition concerning ones person (personal rights or duties), but as to a condition concerning money (monetary rights or claims), the agreement (waiving the claim) is valid; Y.Kidd.I, 59c תניי גוף; ib. תְּנָייוֹ. Ib. ת׳ אפשר … בסופו a condition which he may finally fulfill (depending upon himself). Ex. R. s. 21, v. infra; a. fr.Pl. תְּנָאִים, תְּנָאִין, תְּנָיִים, תְּנָיִין. Y.B. Bath.V.beg.15a כתְנָאֵי יהושוע; B. Kam.80b a. e., v. יְהוֹשוּעַ. Gen. R. s. 5 ת׳ התנההקב״הוכ׳ the Lord (at creation) made stipulations with the sea, that it should be divided before Israel, as it is written (Ex. 14:27), ‘and the sea returned … to its former condition (לְאֵיתָנוֹ), לת׳ שהתנה עמו to the stipulations which ; Ex. R. s. 21 לתְנָאוֹ שהתניתי עמו to the condition which I stipulated with it. Y.Sot.VII, beg.21b כת׳ שבלבינו לא כת׳וכ׳ (we administer the oath to thee) according to the conditions in our mind, not according to the conditions (mental reservations) in thy mind. Ib. שלא יאמרו יש ת׳ לשבועות that people should not say, mental reservations in oaths are permissible. Y.Kidd.I, 58c בתניים שבו קידש he betrothed her by the stipulations in the document (although the material on which it was written was forbidden for use), opp. בגופו with the object itself; a. fr.

    Jewish literature > תְּנַאי

  • 5 תְּנַּיי

    תְּנַאי, תְּנַּייm. (תָּנָה) (alternative,) stipulation, condition, agreement. Keth.19b ת׳ היו דברינו if witnesses say, the transaction to which we have testified was made dependent on a (verbal) condition (and we do not know that it has been fulfilled). Ib. או דילמא ת׳ מילתאוכ׳ or is a statement concerning a condition something different (from a statement concerning a trust, v. אְמָנָה)? Ib. עד אחד אומר ת׳ … אינו ת׳ if one of the witnesses says, there was a condition, and the other says, there was none. Kidd.III, 4 כל ת׳ שאינו … אינו ת׳ a stipulation of conditions which is not like the stipulations concerning the sons of Gad and Reuben (stating both alternatives, Num. 32:20–23;) is not valid. Ib. 61a, sq. ת׳ כפול a double stipulation, an agreement stating both alternatives and their eventual consequences. Gitt.75a ת׳ קודם למעשה the condition (in the agreement) preceding the act (e. g. ‘if such and such a thing is done, this shall be thy letter of divorce, not, ‘this shall be thy letter of divorce, if such and such a thing is done). Ib. ת׳ בדבר אחד ומעשהוכ׳ if the condition concerns one thing, and the consequence another thing (e. g. if you go with your brethren to conquer, you shall have the trans-Jordanic lands); ib. b הכא דת׳ ומעשה בדבר אחד whereas in this case (‘this shall be thy letter of divorce on condition that thou wilt return to me the paper on which the letter of divorce is written) condition and consequence concern the same thing. Keth.IX, 1 כל המתנה … תְּנָאוֹ בטל if one makes a stipulation which is contrary to what is written in the Torah, his stipulation is void; Y. ib. 32d bot. בת׳ גוף אבל בת׳ ממוןוכ׳ this refers only to a condition concerning ones person (personal rights or duties), but as to a condition concerning money (monetary rights or claims), the agreement (waiving the claim) is valid; Y.Kidd.I, 59c תניי גוף; ib. תְּנָייוֹ. Ib. ת׳ אפשר … בסופו a condition which he may finally fulfill (depending upon himself). Ex. R. s. 21, v. infra; a. fr.Pl. תְּנָאִים, תְּנָאִין, תְּנָיִים, תְּנָיִין. Y.B. Bath.V.beg.15a כתְנָאֵי יהושוע; B. Kam.80b a. e., v. יְהוֹשוּעַ. Gen. R. s. 5 ת׳ התנההקב״הוכ׳ the Lord (at creation) made stipulations with the sea, that it should be divided before Israel, as it is written (Ex. 14:27), ‘and the sea returned … to its former condition (לְאֵיתָנוֹ), לת׳ שהתנה עמו to the stipulations which ; Ex. R. s. 21 לתְנָאוֹ שהתניתי עמו to the condition which I stipulated with it. Y.Sot.VII, beg.21b כת׳ שבלבינו לא כת׳וכ׳ (we administer the oath to thee) according to the conditions in our mind, not according to the conditions (mental reservations) in thy mind. Ib. שלא יאמרו יש ת׳ לשבועות that people should not say, mental reservations in oaths are permissible. Y.Kidd.I, 58c בתניים שבו קידש he betrothed her by the stipulations in the document (although the material on which it was written was forbidden for use), opp. בגופו with the object itself; a. fr.

    Jewish literature > תְּנַּיי

  • 6 AT

    I) prep.
    A. with dative.
    I. Of motion;
    1) towards, against;
    Otkell laut at Skamkatli, bowed down to S.;
    hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge against A.;
    Brynjólfr gengr alit at honum, quite up to him;
    þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters with him;
    3) to, at;
    koma at landi, to come to land;
    ganga at dómi, to go into court;
    4) along (= eptir);
    ganga at stræti, to walk along the street;
    dreki er niðr fór at ánni (went down the river) fyrir strauminum;
    refr dró hörpu at ísi, on the ice;
    5) denoting hostility;
    renna (sœkja) at e-m, to rush at, assault;
    gerði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog;
    6) around;
    vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a veil round one’s head;
    bera grjót at e-m, to heap stones upon the body;
    7) denoting business, engagement;
    ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after horses, watching sheep;
    fara at landskuldum, to go collecting rents.
    II. Of position, &c.;
    1) denoting presence at, near, by, upon;
    at kirkju, at church;
    at dómi, in court;
    at lögbergi, at the hill of laws;
    2) denoting participation in;
    vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, wedding;
    3) ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at;
    kvalararnir, er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him;
    var þar at kona nökkur at binda (was there busy dressing) sár manna;
    4) with proper names of places (farms);
    konungr at Danmörku ok Noregi, king of;
    biskup at Hólum, bishop of Holar;
    at Helgafelli, at Bergþórshváli;
    5) used ellipt. with a genitive, at (a person’s) house;
    at hans (at his house) gisti fjölmenni mikit;
    at Marðar, at Mara’s home;
    at hins beilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church;
    at Ránar, at Ran’s (abode).
    III. Of time;
    1) at, in;
    at upphafi, at first, in the beginning;
    at skilnaði, at parting, when they parted;
    at páskum, at Easter;
    at kveldi, at eventide;
    at fjöru, at the ebb;
    at flœðum, at the floodtide;
    2) adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr’;
    at ári komanda, next year;
    at vári, er kemr, next spring;
    generally with ‘komanda’ understood;
    at sumri, hausti, vetri, vári, next summer, &c.;
    3) used with an absolute dative and present or past part.;
    at sér lifanda, duing his lifetime;
    at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all;
    at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the hearing of the chief;
    at upprennandi sólu, at sunrise;
    at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks are past;
    at honum önduðum, after his death;
    4) denoting uninterrupted succession, after;
    hverr at öðrum, annarr at öðrum, one after another;
    skildu menn at þessu, thereupon, after this;
    at því (thereafter) kómu aðrar meyjar.
    IV. fig. and in various uses;
    1) to, into, with the notion of destruction or change;
    brenna (borgina) at ösku, to burn to ashes;
    verða at ormi, to become a snake;
    2) for, as;
    gefa e-t at gjöf, as a present;
    eiga e-n at vin, to have one as friend;
    3) by;
    taka sverð at hjöltum, by the hilt;
    draga út björninn at hlustunum, by the ears;
    kjósa at afli, álitum, by strength, appearrance;
    auðigr at fé, wealthy in goods;
    vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face;
    5) as a law term, on the grounds of, by reason of;
    ryðja ( to challenge) dóm at mægðum, kvið at frændsemi;
    6) as a paraphrase of a genitive;
    faðir, móðir at barni (= barns, of a child);
    aðili at sök = aðili sakar;
    7) with adjectives denoting colour, size, age, of;
    hvítr, svartr, rauðr at lit, while, black, red of colour;
    mikill, lítill at stœrð, vexti, tall, small of stature;
    tvítugr at aldri, twenty years of age;
    kýr at fyrsta, öðrum kálfi, a cow that has calved once, twice;
    8) determining the source from which anything comes, of, from;
    Ari nam ok marga frœði at Þuríði (from her);
    þiggja, kaupa, geta, leigja e-t at e-m, to receive, buy, obtain, borrow a thing from one;
    hafa veg (virðing) styrk at e-m, to derive honour, power, from one;
    9) according, to, after (heygðr at fornum sið);
    at ráði allra vitrustu manna, by the advice of;
    at landslögum, by the law of the land;
    at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave;
    10) in adverbial phrases;
    gróa (vera grœddr) at heilu, to be quite healed;
    bíta af allt gras at snøggu, quite bare;
    at fullu, fully;
    at vísu, surely;
    at frjálsu, freely;
    at eilífu, for ever and ever;
    at röngu, at réttu, wrongly, rightly;
    at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same;
    at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent.
    B. with acc., after, upon (= eptir);
    sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, to take the inheritance after his father;
    at þat (= eptir þat), after that, thereafter;
    connected with a past part. or a., at Gamla fallinn, after the fall of Gamli;
    at Hrungni dauðan, upon the death of Hrungnir.
    1) as the simple mark of the infinitive, to;
    at ganga, at ríða, at hlaupa, to walk, to ride, to run;
    2) in an objective sense;
    hann bauð þeim at fara, sitja, he bade (ordered) them to go, sit;
    gefa e-m at eta, at drekka, to give one to eat, to drink;
    3) denoting design or purpose, in order to (hann gekk í borg at kaupa silfr).
    1) demonstrative particle before a comparative, the, all the, so much the;
    hón grét at meir, she wept the more;
    þykkir oss at líkara, all the more likely;
    þú ert maðr at verri (so much the worse), er þú hefir þetta mælt;
    2) rel. pron., who, which, that (= er);
    þeir allir, at þau tíðindi heyrðu, all those who heard;
    sem þeim er títt, at ( as is the custom of those who) kaupferðir reka.
    conj., that;
    1) introducing a subjective or objective clause;
    þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, it happened once that H.;
    vilda ek, at þú réðist austr í fjörðu, I should like you to go;
    2) relative to svá, denoting proportion, degree;
    svá mikill lagamaðr, at, so great a lawyer, that;
    3) with subj., denoting end or purpose, in order that (skáru þeir fyrir þá (viz. hestana) melinn, at þeir dœi eigi af sulti);
    4) since, because, as (= því at);
    5) connected with þó, því, svá;
    þó at (with subj.), though, although;
    því at, because, for;
    svá at, so that;
    6) temp., þá at (= þá er), when;
    þegar at (= þegar er), as soon as;
    þar til at (= þar til er), until, till;
    áðr at (= á. en), before;
    7) used superfluously after an int. pron. or adv.;
    Ólafr spurði, hvern styrk at hann mundi fá honum, what help he was likely to give him;
    in a relative sense; með fullkomnum ávexti, hverr at (which) þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða.
    V)
    negative verbal suffix, = ata; var-at, was not.
    odda at, Yggs at, battle.
    * * *
    1.
    and að, prep., often used ellipt. dropping the case and even merely as an adverb, [Lat. ad; Ulf. at = πρός and παρά, A. S. ät; Engl. at; Hel. ad = apud; O. H. G. az; lost in mod. Germ., and rare in Swed. and Dan.; in more freq. use in Engl. than any other kindred language, Icel. only excepted]:—the mod. pronunciation and spelling is (); this form is very old, and is found in Icel. vellum MSS. of the 12th century, e. g. aþ, 623. 60; yet in earlier times it was sounded with a tenuis, as we may infer from rhymes, e. g. jöfurr hyggi at | hve ek yrkja fat, Egill: Sighvat also makes it rhyme with a t. The verse by Thorodd—þar vastu at er fjáðr klæðið þvat (Skálda 162)—is hardly intelligible unless we accept the spelling with an aspirate (), and say that þvað is = þvá = þváði, lavabat; it may be that by the time of Thorodd and Ari the pure old pronunciation was lost, or is ‘þvat’ simply the A. S. þvât, secuit? The Icelanders still, however, keep the tenuis in compounds before a vowel, or before h, v, or the liquids l, r, thus—atyrða, atorka, athöfn, athugi, athvarf, athlægi; atvinna, atvik; atlaga, atlíðanði ( slope), atriði, atreið, atróðr: but aðdjúpr, aðfinsla (critic), aðferð, aðkoma, aðsókn, aðsúgr (crowding), aðgæzla. In some words the pronunciation is irregular, e. g. atkvæði not aðkv-; atburðr, but aðbúnaðr; aðhjúkran not athjúkran; atgörvi not aðgörfi. At, to, towards; into; against; along, by; in regard to; after.
    Mostly with dat.; rarely with acc.; and sometimes ellipt.—by dropping the words ‘home,’ ‘house,’ or the like—with gen.
    WITH DAT.
    A. LOC.
    I. WITH MOTION; gener. the motion to the borders, limits of an object, and thus opp. to frá:
    1. towards, against, with or without the notion of arrival, esp. connected with verbs denoting motion (verba movendi et eundi), e. g. fara, ganga, koma, lúta, snúa, rétta at…; Otkell laut at Skamkatli, O. louted (i. e. bowed down) towards S., Nj. 77, Fms. xi. 102; sendimaðrinn sneri ( turned) hjöltum sverðsins at konungi, towards the king, i. 15; hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge towards A., Nj. 220; rétta e-t at e-m, to reach, hand over, Ld. 132; ganga at, to step towards, Ísl. ii. 259.
    2. denoting proximity, close up to, up to; Brynjólfr gengr … allt at honum, B. goes quite up to him, Nj. 58; Gunnarr kom þangat at þeim örunum, G. reached them even there with his arrows, 115; þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters, id.; reið maðr at þeim (up to them), 274; þeir höfðu rakit sporin allt at ( right up to) gammanum, Fms. i. 9; komu þeir at sjó fram, came down to the sea, Bárð. 180.
    3. without reference to the space traversed, to or at; koma at landi, to land, Ld. 38, Fms. viii. 358; ríða at dyrum, Boll. 344; hlaupa at e-m, to run up to, run at, Fms. vii. 218, viii. 358; af sjáfarganginum er hann gekk at landinu, of the surf dashing against the shore, xi. 6; vísa ólmum hundi at manni, to set a fierce hound at a man, Grág. ii. 118; leggja e-n at velli, to lay low, Eg. 426, Nj. 117; hníga at jörðu, at grasi, at moldu, to bite the dust, to die, Njarð. 378; ganga at dómi, a law term, to go into court, of a plaintiff, defendant, or bystander, Nj. 87 (freq.)
    4. denoting a motion along, into, upon; ganga at stræti, to walk along the street, Korm. 228, Fms. vii. 39; at ísi, on the ice, Skálda 198, Fms. vii. 19, 246, viii. 168, Eb. 112 new Ed. (á is perh. wrong); máttu menn ganga bar yfir at skipum einum, of ships alone used as a bridge, Fas. i. 378; at höfðum, at nám, to trample on the slain on the battle-field, Lex. Poët.; at ám, along the rivers; at merkiósum, at the river’s mouth, Grág. ii. 355; at endilöngu baki, all along its back, Sks. 100.
    5. denoting hostility, to rush at, assault; renna at, hlaupa at, ganga, fara, ríða, sækja, at e-m, (v. those words), whence the nouns atrenna, athlaup, atgangr, atför, atreið, atsókn, etc.
    β. metaph., kom at þeim svefnhöfgi, deep sleep fell on them, Nj. 104. Esp. of weather, in the impers. phrase, hríð, veðr, vind, storm görir at e-m, to be overtaken by a snow storm, gale, or the like; görði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog, Bárð. 171.
    6. denoting around, of clothing or the like; bregða skikkju at höfði sér, to wrap his cloak over his head, Ld. 62; vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a snood round her head, 188; sauma at, to stick, cling close, as though sewn on; sauma at höndum sér, of tight gloves, Bs. i. 453; kyrtill svá þröngr sem saumaðr væri at honum, as though it were stitched to him, Nj. 214; vafit at vándum dreglum, tight laced with sorry tags, id.; hosa strengd fast at beini, of tight hose, Eg. 602; hann sveipar at sér iðrunum ok skyrtunni, he gathers up the entrails close to him and the skirt too, Gísl. 71; laz at síðu, a lace on the side, to keep the clothes tight, Eg. 602.
    β. of burying; bera grjót at einum, to heap stones upon the body, Eg. 719; var gör at þeim dys or grjóti, Ld. 152; gora kistu at líki, to make a coffin for a body, Eb. 264, Landn. 56, Ld. 142.
    γ. of summoning troops or followers; stefna at sér mönnum, to summon men to him, Nj. 104; stefna at sér liði, Eg. 270; kippa mönnum at sér, to gather men in haste, Ld. 64.
    7. denoting a business, engagement; ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after after horses, watching sheep, Glúm. 362, Nj. 75; fara at fé, to go to seek for sheep, Ld. 240; fara at heyi, to go a-haymaking, Dropl. 10; at veiðum, a-hunting; at fuglum, a-fowling; at dýrum, a-sbooting; at fiski, a-fishing; at veiðiskap, Landn. 154, Orkn. 416 (in a verse), Nj. 25; fara at landskuldum, to go a-collecling rents, Eg. 516; at Finnkaupum, a-marketing with Finns, 41; at féföngum, a-plundering, Fms. vii. 78; ganga at beina, to wait on guests, Nj. 50; starfa at matseld, to serve at table, Eb. 266; hitta e-n at nauðsynjum, on matters of business; at máli, to speak with one, etc., Fms. xi. 101; rekast at e-m, to pursue one, ix. 404; ganga at liði sér, to go suing for help, Grág. ii. 384.
    β. of festivals; snúa, fá at blóti, veizlu, brullaupi, to prepare for a sacrificial banquet, wedding, or the like, hence at-fangadagr, Eb. 6, Ld. 70; koma at hendi, to happen, befall; ganga at sínu, to come by one’s own, to take it, Ld. 208; Egill drakk hvert full er at honum kom, drained every horn that came to him, Eg. 210; komast at keyptu, to purchase dearly, Húv. 46.
    8. denoting imaginary motion, esp. of places, cp. Lat. spectare, vergere ad…, to look or lie towards; horfði botninn at höfðanum, the bight of the bay looked toward the headland, Fms. i. 340, Landn. 35; also, skeiðgata liggr at læknum, leads to the brook, Ísl. ii. 339; á þann arminn er vissi at sjánum, on that wing which looked toward the sea, Fms. viii. 115; sár þau er horft höfðu at Knúti konungi, xi. 309.
    β. even connected with verbs denoting motion; Gilsáreyrr gengr austan at Fljótinu, G. extends, projects to F. from the east, Hrafh. 25; hjá sundi því, er at gengr þingstöðinni, Fms. xi. 85.
    II. WITHOUT MOTION; denoting presence at, near, by, at the side of, in, upon; connected with verbs like sitja, standa, vera…; at kirkju, at church, Fms. vii. 251, K. f). K. 16, Ld. 328, Ísl. ii. 270, Sks. 36; vera at skála, at húsi, to be in, at home, Landn. 154; at landi, Fms. i. 82; at skipi, on shipboard, Grág. i. 209, 215; at oldri, at a banquet, inter pocula; at áti, at dinner, at a feast, inter edendum, ii. 169, 170; at samförum ok samvistum, at public meetings, id.; at dómi, in a court; standa (to take one’s stand) norðan, sunnan, austan, vestan at dómi, freq. in the proceedings at trials in lawsuits, Nj.; at þingi, present at the parliament, Grág. i. 142; at lögbergi, o n the hill of laws, 17, Nj.; at baki e-m, at the back of.
    2. denoting presence, partaking in; sitja at mat, to sit at meat, Fms. i. 241; vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, nuptials, Nj. 51, Ld. 70: a law term, vera at vígi, to be an accessory in manslaying, Nj. 89, 100; vera at e-u simply means to be about, be busy in, Fms. iv. 237; standa at máli, to stand by one in a case, Grág. ii. 165, Nj. 214; vera at fóstri, to be fostered, Fms. i. 2; sitja at hégóma, to listen to nonsense, Ld. 322; vera at smíð, to be at one’s work, Þórð. 62: now absol., vera at, to go on with, be busy at.
    3. the law term vinna eið at e-u has a double meaning:
    α. vinna eið at bók, at baugi, to make an oath upon the book by laying the band upon it, Landn. 258, Grág., Nj.; cp. Vkv. 31, Gkv. 3. 3, Hkv. 2. 29, etc.: ‘við’ is now used in this sense.
    β. to confirm a fact (or the like) by an oath, to swear to, Grág. i. 9, 327.
    γ. the law phrase, nefna vátta at e-u, of summoning witnesses to a deed, fact, or the like; nefna vátta at benjum, to produce evidence, witnesses as to the wounds, Nj., Grág.; at görð, Eg. 738; at svörum, Grág. i. 19: this summoning of witnesses served in old lawsuits the same purpose as modern pleadings and depositions; every step in a suit to be lawful must be followed by such a summoning or declaration.
    4. used ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at; kvalararnir er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him; þar varstu at, you were there present, Skálda 162; at várum þar, Gísl. (in a verse): as a law term ‘vera at’ means to be guilty, Glúm. 388; vartattu at þar, Eg. (in a verse); hence the ambiguity of Glum’s oath, vask at þar, I was there present: var þar at kona nokkur ( was there busy) at binda sár manna, Fms. v. 91; hann var at ok smíðaði skot, Rd. 313; voru Varbelgir at ( about) at taka af, þau lög …, Fms. ix. 512; ek var at ok vafk, I was about weaving, xi. 49; þeir höfðu verit at þrjú sumur, they had been busy at it for three summers, x. 186 (now very freq.); koma at, come in, to arrive unexpectedly; Gunnarr kom at í því, G. came in at that moment; hvaðan komtú nú at, whence did you come? Nj. 68, Fms. iii. 200.
    5. denoting the kingdom or residence of a king or princely person; konungr at Danmörk ok Noregi, king of…, Fms. i. 119, xi. 281; konungr, jarl, at öllum Noregi, king, earl, over all N., íb. 3, 13, Landn. 25; konungr at Dyflinni, king of Dublin, 25; but í or yfir England!, Eg. 263: cp. the phrase, sitja at landi, to reside, of a king when at home, Hkr. i. 34; at Joini, Fms. xi. 74: used of a bishop; biskup at Hólum, bishop of Hólar, Íb. 18, 19; but biskup í Skálaholti, 19: at Rómi, at Rome, Fbr. 198.
    6. in denoting a man’s abode (vide p. 5, col. 1, l. 27), the prep. ‘at’ is used where the local name implies the notion of by the side of, and is therefore esp. applied to words denoting a river, brook, rock, mountain, grove, or the like, and in some other instances, by, at, e. g. at Hofi (a temple), Landn. 198; at Borg ( a castle), 57; at Helgafelli (a mountain), Eb. constantly so; at Mosfelli, Landn. 190; at Hálsi (a hill), Fms. xi. 22; at Bjargi, Grett. 90; Hálsum, Landn. 143; at Á ( river), 296, 268; at Bægisá, 212; Giljá, 332; Myrká, 211; Vatnsá, id.; þverá, Glúm. 323; at Fossi (a ‘force’ or waterfall), Landn. 73; at Lækjamoti (waters-meeting), 332; at Hlíðarenda ( end of the lithe or hill), at Bergþórshváli, Nj.; at Lundi (a grove), at Melum (sandhill), Landn. 70: the prep. ‘á’ is now used in most of these cases, e. g. á Á, á Hofi, Helgafelli, Felli, Hálsi, etc.
    β. particularly, and without any regard to etymology, used of the abode of kings or princes, to reside at; at Uppsölum, at Haugi, Alreksstöðum, at Hlöðum, Landn., Fms.
    γ. konungr lét kalla at stofudyrum, the king made a call at the hall door, Eg. 88; þeir kölluðu at herberginu, they called at the inn, Fms. ix. 475.
    7. used ellipt. with a gen., esp. if connected with such words as gista, to be a guest, lodge, dine, sup (of festivals or the like) at one’s home; at Marðar, Nj. 4; at hans, 74; þingfesti at þess bóanda, Grág. i. 152; at sín, at one’s own home, Eg. 371, K. Þ. K. 62; hafa náttstað at Freyju, at the abode of goddess Freyja, Eg. 603; at Ránar, at Ran’s, i. e. at Ran’s house, of drowned men who belong to the queen of the sea, Ran, Eb. 274; at hins heilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church, Fms. vi. 63: cp. ad Veneris, εις Κίμωνος.
    B. TEMP.
    I. at, denoting a point or period of time; at upphafi, at first, in the beginning, Ld. 104; at lyktum, at síðustu, at lokum, at last; at lesti, at last, Lex. Poët., more freq. á lesti; at skilnaði, at parting, at last, Band. 3; at fornu, in times of yore, formerly, Eg. 267, D. I. i. 635; at sinni, as yet, at present; at nýju, anew, of present time; at eilífu, for ever and ever; at skömmu, soon, shortly, Ísl. ii. 272, v. l.
    II. of the very moment when anything happens, the beginning of a term; denoting the seasons of the year, months, weeks, the hours of the day; at Jólum, at Yule, Nj. 46; at Pálmadegi, on Palm Sunday, 273; at Páskum, at Easter; at Ólafsvöku, on St. Olave’s eve, 29th of July, Fms.; at vetri, at the beginning of the winter, on the day when winter sets in, Grág. 1. 151; at sumarmálum, at vetrnáttum; at Tvímánaði, when the Double month (August) begins, Ld. 256, Grág. i. 152; at kveldi, at eventide, Eg. 3; at því meli, at that time; at eindaga, at the term, 395; at eykð, at 4 o’clock p. m., 198; at öndverðri æfi Abra hams, Ver. II; at sinni, now at once, Fms. vi. 71; at öðruhverju, every now and then.
    β. where the point of time is marked by some event; at þingi, at the meeting of parliament (18th to the 24th of June), Ld. 182; at féránsdómi, at the court of execution, Grág. i. 132, 133; at þinglausnum, at the close of the parliament (beginning of July), 140; at festarmálum, eðr at eiginorði, at betrothal or nuptials, 174; at skilnaði, when they parted, Nj. 106 (above); at öllum minnum, at the general drinking of the toasts, Eg. 253; at fjöru, at the ebb; at flæðum, at flood tide, Fms. viii. 306, Orkn. 428; at hrörum, at an inquest, Grág. i. 50 (cp. ii. 141, 389); at sökum, at prosecutions, 30; at sinni, now, as yet, v. that word.
    III. ellipt., or adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr,’ of the future time:
    1. ellipt., komanda or the like being understood, with reference to the seasons of the year; at sumri, at vetri, at hausti, at vári, next summer, winter…, Ísl. ii. 242; at miðju sumri, at ári, at Midsummer, next year, Fas. i. 516; at miðjum vetri, Fms. iv. 237,
    2. adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr;’ at ári komanda, Bárð. 177; at vári er kemr, Dipl. iii. 6.
    IV. used with an absolute dat. and with a pres. part.:
    1. with pres. part.; at morni komanda, on the coming morrow, Fms. i. 263; at sér lifanda, in vivo, in his life time, Grág. ii. 202; at þeim sofundum, illis dormientibus, Hkr. i. 234; at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all, Fms. x. 329; at úvitanda konungi, illo nesciente, without his knowledge, 227; at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the chief’s bearing, 235.
    2. of past time with a past part. (Lat. abl. absol.); at hræjum fundnum, on the bodies being found, Grág. ii. 87; at háðum dómum ok föstu þingi, during the session, the courts being set, i. 484; at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks past, Band. 13; at svá búnu, so goru, svá komnu, svá mæltu (Lat. quibus rebus gestis, dictis, quo facto, dicto, etc.), v. those words; at úreyndu, without trial, without put ting one to the test, Ld. 76; at honum önduðum, illo mortuo.
    3. ellipt. without ‘at;’ en þessum hlutum fram komnum, when all this has been done, Eb. 132.
    V. in some phrases with a slight temp, notion; at görðum gildum, the fences being strong, Gþl. 387; at vörmu spori, at once, whilst the trail is warm; at úvörum, unawares, suddenly, Nj. 95, Ld. 132; at þessu, at this cost, on that condition, Eb. 38, Nj. 55; at illum leiki, to have a narrow escape, now við illan leik, Fms. ix. 473; at því, that granted, Grág. ii. 33: at því, at pessu, thereafter, thereupon, Nj. 76.
    2. denoting succession, without interruption, one after another; hverr at öðrum, annarr maðr at öðrum, aðrir at öðrum; eina konu at annarri, Eg. 91, Fms. ii. 236, vi. 25, Bs. i. 22, 625. 80, H. E. i. 522.
    C. METAPH. and in various cases:
    I. denoting a transformation or change into, to, with the notion of destruction; brenna at ösku, at köldum kolum, to burn to ashes, to be quite destroyed, Fms. i. 105, Edda 3, Sturl. ii. 51: with the notion of transformation or transfiguration, in such phrases as, verða at e-u, göra e-t at e-u, to turn it into:
    α. by a spell; verða at ormi, to become a snake, Fms. xi. 158; at flugdrekum, Gullþ. 7; urðu þau bönd at járni, Edda 40.
    β. by a natural process it can often be translated by an acc. or by as; göra e-n at urðarmanni, to make him an outlaw, Eg. 728; græða e-n at orkumlamanni, to heal him so as to maim him for life, of bad treatment by a leech, Eb. 244: in the law terms, sár görist at ben, a wound turning into a ben, proving to be mortal, Grág., Nj.; verða at ljúgvætti, to prove to be a false evidence, Grág. i. 44; verða at sætt, to turn into reconciliation, Fms. i. 13; göra e-t at reiði málum, to take offence at, Fs. 20; at nýjum tíðindum, to tell as news, Nj. 14; verða fátt at orðum, to be sparing of words, 18; kveðr (svá) at orði, to speak, utter, 10; verða at þrifnaði, to geton well, Fms. vii. 196: at liði, at skaða, to be a help or hurt to one; at bana, to cause one’s death, Nj. 223, Eg. 21, Grág. ii. 29: at undrum, at hlátri, to become a wonder, a laughing-stock, 623. 35, Eg. 553.
    II. denoting capacity, where it may be translated merely by as or for; gefa at Jólagjöf, to give for a Christmas-box, Eg. 516; at gjöf, for a present; at erfð, at láni, launum, as an inheritance, a loan; at kaupum ok sökum, for buying and selling, Ísl. ii. 223, Grág. i. 423; at solum, ii. 204; at herfangi, as spoil or plunder; at sakbótum, at niðgjöldum, as a compensation, weregeld, i. 339, ii. 171, Hkr. ii. 168; taka at gíslingu, to take as an hostage, Edda 15; eiga e-n at vin, at óvin, to have one as friend or foe, illt er at eiga þræl at eingavin, ‘tis ill to have a thrall for one’s bosom friend (a proverb), Nj. 77; fæða, eiga, at sonum (syni), to beget a son, Edda 8, Bs. i. 60 (but eiga at dóttur cannot be said); hafa möttul at yfirhöfn, Fms. vii. 201; verða nökkut at manni (mönnum), to turn out to be a worthy man; verða ekki at manni, to turn out a worthless person, xi. 79, 268.
    2. in such phrases as, verða at orðum, to come towards, Nj. 26; var þat at erindum, Eg. 148; hafa at veizlum, to draw veizlur ( dues) from, Fms. iv. 275, Eg. 647; gora e-t at álitum, to take it into consideration, Nj. 3.
    III. denoting belonging to, fitting, of parts of the whole or the like; vóru at honum (viz. the sword) hjölt gullbúin, the sword was ornamented with a hilt of gold, Ld. 330; umgörð at ( belonging to) sverði, Fs. 97 (Hs.) in a verse; en ef mór er eigi at landinu, if there be no turf moor belonging to the land, Grág. ii. 338; svá at eigi brotnaði nokkuð at Orminum, so that no harm happened to the ship Worm, Fms. x. 356; hvatki er meiðir at skipinu eðr at reiðinu eðr at viðum, damage done t o …, Grág. ii. 403; lesta ( to injure) hús at lásum, við eðr torfi, 110; ef land hefir batnað at húsum, if the land has been bettered as to its buildings, 210; cp. the phrase, göra at e-u, to repair: hamlaðr at höndum eðr fótum, maimed as to hands or feet, Eg. 14; heill at höndum en hrumr at fótum, sound in band, palsied in foot, Fms. vii. 12; lykill at skrá, a key belonging, fitting, to the latch; hurð at húsi; a key ‘gengr at’ ( fits) skrá; and many other phrases. 2. denoting the part by which a thing is held or to which it belongs, by; fá, taka at…, to grasp by …; þú tókt við sverði hans at hjöltunum, you took it by the bill, Fms. i. 15; draga út björninn at hlustum, to pull out the bear by the ears, Fas. ii. 237; at fótum, by the feet, Fms. viii. 363; mæla ( to measure) at hrygg ok at jaðri, by the edge or middle of the stuff, Grág. i. 498; kasta e-m at höfði, head foremost, Nj. 84; kjósa e-n at fótum, by the feet alone, Edda 46; hefja frændsemi at bræðrum, eða at systkynum, to reckon kinship by the brother’s or the sister’s side, Grág. i. 28; kjósa at afli, at álitum, by strength, sight, Gs. 8, belongs rather to the following.
    IV. in respect of, as regards, in regard to, as to; auðigr at fé, wealthy of goods, Nj. 16, 30, 51; beztir hestar at reið, the best racehorses, 186; spekingr at viti, a man of great intellect, Ld. 124; vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face, Nj. 30, Bs. i. 61; kvenna vænst at ásjónu ok vits munum, of surpassing beauty and intellect, Ld. 122; fullkominn at hyggju, 18; um fram aðra menn at vinsældum ok harðfengi, of surpassing popularity and hardihood, Eb. 30.
    2. a law term, of challenging jurors, judges, or the like, on account of, by reason of; ryðja ( to challenge) at mægðum, guðsifjum, frændsemi, hrörum …; at leiðarlengd, on account of distance, Grág. i. 30, 50, Nj. (freq.)
    3. in arithm. denoting proportion; at helmingi, þriðjungi, fjórðungi, tíunda hluta, cp. Lat. ex asse, quadrante, for the half, third… part; máttr skal at magni (a proverb), might and main go together, Hkr. ii. 236; þú munt vera at því mikill fræðimaðr á kvæði, in the same proportion, as great, Fms. vi. 391, iii. 41; at e-s hluta, at… leiti, for one’s part, in turn, as far as one is con cerned, Grág. i. 322, Eg. 309, Fms. iii. 26 (freq.): at öðrum kosti, in the other case, otherwise (freq.) More gener., at öllu, öngu, in all (no) respects; at sumu, einhverju, nokkru, partly; at flestu, mestu, chiefly.
    4. as a paraphrase of a genitive; faðir, móðir at barni (= barns); aðili at sök (= sakar a.); morðingi at barni (= barns), faðerni at barni (barns); illvirki at fé manna (cp. Lat. felo de se), niðrfall at sökum (saka), land gangr at fiskum (fiska), Fms. iv. 274, Grág. i. 277, 416, N. G. L. i. 340, K. Þ. K. 112, Nj. 21.
    5. the phrase ‘at sér,’ of himself or in himself, either ellipt. or by adding the participle görr, and with the adverbs vel, ilia, or the like; denoting breeding, bearing, endowments, character …; væn kona, kurteis ok vel at sér, an accomplished, well-bred, gifted lady, Nj. I; vitr maðr ok vel at sér, a wise man and thoroughly good in feeling and bearing, 5; þú ert maðr vaskr ok vel at þér, 49; gerr at sér, accomplished, 51; bezt at sér görr, the finest, best bred man, 39, Ld. 124; en þó er hann svá vel at sér, so generous, Nj. 77; þeir höfðingjar er svá vóru vel at sér, so noble-minded, 198, Fms. i. 160: the phrase ‘at sér’ is now only used of knowledge, thus maðr vel að sér means clever, a man of great knowledge; illa að sér, a blockhead.
    6. denoting relations to colour, size, value, age, and the like; hvitr, svartr, grár, rauðr … at lit, white, swarthy, gray, red … of colour, Bjarn. 55, 28, Ísl. ii. 213, etc.; mikill, lítill, at stærð, vexti, tall, small of size, etc.; ungr, gamall, barn, at aldri, young, old, a child of age; tvítugr, þrítugr … at aldri, twenty, thirty … years of age (freq.): of animals; kyr at fyrsta, öðrum … kálfi, a cow having calved once, twice…, Jb. 346: value, amount, currency of money, kaupa e-t at mörk, at a mark, N. G. L. 1. 352; ok er eyririnn at mörk, amounts to a mark, of the value of money, Grág. i. 392; verðr þá at hálfri murk vaðmála eyrir, amounts to a half a mark, 500.
    β. metaph. of value, connected with verbs denoting to esteem, hold; meta, hafa, halda at miklu, litlu, vettugi, engu, or the like, to hold in high or low esteem, to care or not to care for (freq.): geta e-s at góðu, illu, öngu, to mention one favourably, unfavourably, indifferently … (freq.), prop. in connection with. In many cases it may be translated by in; ekki er mark at draumum, there is no meaning in dreams, no heed is to be paid to dreams, Sturl. ii. 217; bragð er at þá barnið finnr, it goes too far, when even a child takes offence (a proverb): hvat er at því, what does it mean? Nj. 11; hvert þat skip er vöxtr er at, any ship of mark, i. e. however small, Fms. xi. 20.
    V. denoting the source of a thing:
    1. source of infor mation, to learn, perceive, get information from; Ari nam ok marga fræði at Þuríði, learnt as her pupil, at her hands, as St. Paul at the feet of Gamaliel, (just as the Scotch say to speer or ask at a person); Ari nam at Þorgeiri afraðskoll, Hkr. (pref.); nema kunnáttu at e-m, used of a pupil, Fms. i. 8; nema fræði at e-m, xi. 396.
    2. of receiving, acquiring, buying, from; þiggja e-t at e-m, to receive a thing at his hands, Nj. 51; líf, to be pardoned, Fms. x. 173; kaupa land at e-m, to buy it from, Landn. 72, Íb. II, (now af is more freq. in this sense); geta e-t at e-m, to obtain, procure at one’s hands, impetrare; þeirra manna er þeir megu þat geta at, who are willing to do that, Grág. i. I; heimta e-t at e-m (now af), to call in, demand (a debt, money), 279; fala e-t at e-m (now af), to chaffer for or cheapen anything, Nj. 73; sækja e-t at e-m, to ask, seek for; sækja heilræði ok traust at e-m, 98; leiga e-t at e-m (now af), to borrow, Grág. ii. 334; eiga e-t (fé, skuld) at e-m, to be owed money by any one, i. 399: metaph. to deserve of one, Nj. 113; eiga mikit at e-m, to have much to do with, 138; hafa veg, virðing, styrk, at, to derive honour, power from, Fms. vi. 71, Eg. 44, Bárð. 174; gagn, to be of use, Ld. 216; mein, tálma, mischief, disadvantage, 158, 216, cp. Eg. 546; ótta, awe, Nj. 68.
    VI. denoting conformity, according to, Lat. secundum, ex, after; at fornum sið, Fms. i. 112; at sögn Ara prests, as Ari relates, on his authority, 55; at ráði allra vitrustu manna, at the advice of, Ísl. ii. 259, Ld. 62; at lögum, at landslögum, by the law of the land, Grág., Nj.; at líkindum, in all likelihood, Ld. 272; at sköpum, in due course (poet.); at hinum sama hætti, in the very same manner, Grág. i. 90; at vánum, as was to be expected, Nj. 255; at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave, Eg. 35; úlofi, Grág. ii. 215; at ósk, vilja e-s, as one likes…; at mun, id. (poet.); at sólu, happily (following the course of the sun), Bs. i. 70, 137; at því sem …, as to infer from …, Nj. 124: ‘fara, láta, ganga at’ denotes to yield, agree to, to comply with, give in, Ld. 168, Eg. 18, Fms. x. 368.
    VII. in phrases nearly or quite adverbial; gróa, vera græddr, at heilu, to be quite healed, Bárð. 167, Eb. 148; bíta at snöggu, to bite it bare, Fms. xi. 6; at þurru, till it becomes dry, Eb. 276; at endilöngu, all along, Fas. ii; vinnast at litlu, to avail little, 655 x. 14; at fullu, fully, Nj. 257, Hkr. i. 171; at vísu, of a surety, surely, Ld. 40; at frjálsu, freely, 308; at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same, Hom. 80, Nj. 267; at röngu, wrongly, 686 B. 2; at hófi, temperately, Lex. Poët.; at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent; at hringum, utterly, all round, (rare), Fms. x. 389; at einu, yet, Orkn. 358; svá at einu, því at einu, allt at einu, yet, however, nevertheless.
    VIII. connected with comparatives of adverbs and adjectives, and strengthening the sense, as in Engl. ‘the,’ so much the more, all the more; ‘at’ heldr tveimr, at ek munda gjarna veita yðr öllum, where it may be translated by so much the more to two, as I would willingly grant it to all of you; hon grét at meir, she grat (wept) the more, Eg. 483; þykir oss at líkara, all the more likely, Fms. viii. 6; þess at harðari, all the harder, Sturl. iii. 202 C; svá at hinn sé bana at nær, Grág. ii. 117; at auðnara, at hólpnara, the more happy, Al. 19, Grett. 116 B; þess at meiri, Fms. v. 64; auvirðismaðr at meiri, Sturl. ii. 139; maðr at vaskari, id.; at feigri, any the more fey, Km. 22; maðr at verri, all the worse, Nj. 168; ok er ‘at’ firr…, at ek vil miklu heldr, cp. Lat. tantum abest… ut, Eg. 60.
    β. following after a negation; eigi at síðr, no less, Nj. 160, Ld. 146; eigi… at meiri maðr, any better, Eg. 425, 489; erat héra at borgnara, any the better off for that, Fms. vii. 116; eigi at minni, no less for that, Edda (pref.) 146; eigi at minna, Ld. 216, Fms. ix. 50; ekki at verri drengr, not a bit worse for that, Ld. 42; er mér ekki son minn at bættari, þótt…, 216; at eigi vissi at nær, any more, Fas. iii. 74.
    IX. following many words:
    1. verbs, esp. those denoting, a. to ask, enquire, attend, seek, e. g. spyrja at, to speer (ask) for; leita at, to seek for; gæta, geyma at, to pay attention to; huga, hyggja at; hence atspurn, to enquire, aðgæzla, athugi, attention, etc.
    β. verbs denoting laughter, play, joy, game, cp. the Engl. to play at …, to laugh at …; hlæja, brosa at e-u, to laugh, smile at it; leika (sér) at e-u, to play at; þykja gaman at, to enjoy; hæða, göra gys at …, to make sport at …
    γ. verbs denoting assistance, help; standa, veita, vinna, hjálpa at; hence atstoð, atvinna, atverk:—mode, proceeding; fara at, to proceed, hence atför and atferli:—compliance; láta, fara at e-u, v. above:— fault; e-t er at e-u, there is some fault in it, Fms. x. 418; skorta at e-u, to fall short of, xi. 98:—care, attendance; hjúkra at, hlýja at, v. these words:—gathering, collecting; draga, reiða, flytja, fá at, congerere:—engagement, arrival, etc.; sækja at, to attack; ganga at, vera at, to be about; koma at, ellipt. to arrive: göra at, to repair: lesta at, to impair (v. above); finna at, to criticise (mod.); telja at, id.: bera at, to happen; kveða at e-m, to address one, 625. 15, (kveða at (ellipt.) now means to pronounce, and of a child to utter (read) whole syllables); falla at, of the flood-tide (ellipt.): metaph. of pains or straits surrounding one; þreyngja, herða at, to press hard: of frost and cold, with regard to the seasons; frjósa at, kólna at, to get really cold (SI. 44), as it were from the cold stiffening all things: also of the seasons themselves; hausta, vetra að, when the season really sets in; esp. the cold seasons, ‘sumra at’ cannot be used, yet we may say ‘vára að’ when the spring sets in, and the air gets mild.
    δ. in numberless other cases which may partly be seen below.
    2. connected ellipt. with adverbs denoting motion from a place; norðan, austan, sunnan, vestan at, those from the north, east…; utan at, innan at, from the outside or inside.
    3. with adjectives (but rarely), e. g. kærr, elskr, virkr (affectionate), vandr (zealous), at e-m; v. these words.
    WITH ACC.
    TEMP.: Lat. post, after, upon, esp. freq. in poetry, but rare in prose writers, who use eptir; nema reisi niðr at nið (= maðr eptir mann), in succession, of erecting a monument, Hm. 71; in prose, at þat. posthac, deinde, Fms. x. 323, cp. Rm., where it occurs several times, 2, 6, 9, 14, 18, 24, 28, 30, 35; sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, has to take the inheritance after his father, Grág. i. 170 new Ed.; eiga féránsdóm at e-n, Grág. i. 89; at Gamla fallinn, after the death of G., Fms. x. 382; in Edda (Gl.) 113 ought to be restored, grét ok at Oð, gulli Freyja, she grat (wept) tears of gold for her lost husband Od. It is doubtful if it is ever used in a purely loc. sense; at land, Grág. (Sb.)ii. 211, is probably corrupt; at hönd = á hönd, Grág. (Sb.) i. 135; at mót = at móti, v. this word.
    ☞ In compounds (v. below) at- or að- answers in turn to Lat. ad- or in- or con-; atdráttr e. g. denotes collecting; atkoma is adventus: it may also answer to Lat. ob-, in atburðr = accidence, but might also be compared with Lat. occurrere.
    2.
    and að, the mark of the infinitive [cp. Goth. du; A. S. and Engl. to; Germ. zu]. Except in the case of a few verbs ‘at’ is always placed immediately before the infinitive, so as to be almost an inseparable part of the verb.
    I. it is used either,
    1. as, a simple mark of the infinitive, only denoting an action and independent of the subject, e. g. at ganga, at hlaupa, at vita, to go, to run, to know; or,
    2. in an objective sense when following such verbs as bjóða segja…, to invite, command …; hann bauð þeim at ganga, at sitja, be bade, ordered them to go, sit, or the like; or as gefa and fá; gefa e-m at drekka, at eta, to give one to drink or to eat, etc. etc.
    β. with the additional notion of intention, esp. when following verba cogitandi; hann ætlaði, hafði í hyggju at fara, he had it in his mind to go (where ‘to go’ is the real object to ætlaði and hafði í hyggju).
    3. answering to the Gr. ινα, denoting intention, design, in order to; hann gékk í borg at kaupa silfr, in order to buy, Nj. 280; hann sendi riddara sína með þeim at varðveita þær, 623. 45: in order to make the phrase more plain, ‘svá’ and ‘til’ are frequently added, esp. in mod. writers, ‘svá at’ and contr. ‘svát’ (the last however is rare), ‘til at’ and ‘til þess at,’ etc.
    II. in the earlier times the infin., as in Greek and Lat., had no such mark; and some verbs remain that cannot be followed by ‘at;’ these verbs are almost the same in Icel. as in Engl.:
    α. the auxiliary verbs vil, mun ( μέλλω), skal; as in Engl. to is never used after the auxiliaries shall, will, must; ek vil ganga, I will go; ek mun fara, (as in North. E.) I mun go; ek skal göra þat, I shall do that, etc.
    β. the verbs kunna, mega, as in Engl. I can or may do, I dare say; svá hygginn at hann kunni fyrir sökum ráða, Grág. ii. 75; í öllu er prýða má góðan höfðingja, Nj. 90; vera má, it may be; vera kann þat, id.: kunnu, however, takes ‘at’ whenever it means to know, and esp. in common language in phrases such as, það kann að vera, but vera kann þat, v. above.
    γ. lata, biðja, as in Engl. to let, to bid; hann lét (bað) þá fara, he let (bade) them go.
    δ. þykkja, þykjast, to seem; hann þykir vera, he is thought to be: reflex., hann þykist vera, sibi videtur: impers., mér þykir vera, mibi videtur, in all cases without ‘at.’ So also freq. the verbs hugsa, hyggja, ætla, halda, to think, when denoting merely the act of thinking; but if there be any notion of intention or purpose, they assume the ‘at;’ thus hann ætlaði, hugði, þá vera góða menn, he thought them to be, acc. c. inf.; but ætlaði at fara, meant to go, etc.
    ε. the verbs denoting to see, bear; sjá, líta, horfa á … ( videre); heyra, audire, as in Engl. I saw them come, I heard him tell, ek sá þá koma, ek heyrði hann tala.
    ζ. sometimes after the verbs eiga and ganga; hann gékk steikja, be went to roast, Vkv. 9; eiga, esp. when a mere periphrasis instead of skal, móður sína á maðr fyrst fram færa (better at færa), Grág. i. 232; á þann kvið einskis meta, 59; but at meta, id. l. 24; ráða, nema, göra …, freq. in poetry, when they are used as simple auxiliary verbs, e. g. nam hann sér Högna hvetja at rúnum, Skv. 3. 43.
    η. hljóta and verða, when used in the sense of must (as in Engl. he must go), and when placed after the infin.of another verb; hér muntu vera hljóta, Nj. 129; but hljóta at vera: fara hlýtr þú, Fms. 1. 159; but þú hlýtr at fara: verða vita, ii. 146; but verða at vita: hann man verða sækja, þó verðr (= skal) maðr eptir mann lifa, Fms. viii. 19, Fas. ii. 552, are exceptional cases.
    θ. in poetry, verbs with the verbal neg. suffix ‘-at,’ freq. for the case of euphony, take no mark of the infinitive, where it would be indispensable with the simple verb, vide Lex. Poët. Exceptional cases; hvárt sem hann vill ‘at’ verja þá sök, eða, whatever he chooses, either, Grág. i. 64; fyrr viljum vér enga kórónu at bera, en nokkut ófrelsi á oss at taka, we would rather bear no crown than …, Fms. x. 12; the context is peculiar, and the ‘at’ purposely added. It may be left out ellipt.; e. g. þá er guð gefr oss finnast (= at finnast), Dipl. ii. 14; gef honum drekka (= at drekka), Pr. 470; but mostly in unclassical writers, in deeds, or the like, written nastily and in an abrupt style.
    3.
    and að, conj. [Goth. þatei = οτι; A. S. þät; Engl. that; Germ, dass; the Ormul. and Scot. at, see the quotations sub voce in Jamieson; in all South-Teutonic idioms with an initial dental: the Scandinavian idioms form an exception, having all dropped this consonant; Swed. åt, Dan. at]. In Icel. the Bible translation (of the 16th century) was chiefly based upon that of Luther; the hymns and the great bulk of theol. translations of that time were also derived from Germany; therefore the germanised form það frequently appears in the Bible, and was often employed by theol. authors in sermons since the time of the Reformation. Jón Vidalin, the greatest modern Icel. preacher, who died in 1720, in spite of his thoroughly classical style, abounds in the use of this form; but it never took root in the language, and has never passed into the spoken dialect. After a relative or demonstr. pronoun, it freq. in mod. writers assumes the form eð, hver eð, hverir eð, hvað eð, þar eð. Before the prep. þú (tu), þ changes into t, and is spelt in a single word attú, which is freq. in some MS.;—now, however, pronounced aððú, aððeir, aððið …, = að þú…, with the soft Engl. th sound. It gener. answers to Lat. ut, or to the relat. pron. qui.
    I. that, relative to svá, to denote proportion, degree, so…, that, Lat. tam, tantus, tot…, ut; svá mikill lagamaðr, at…, so great a lawyer, that…, Nj. 1; hárið svá mikit, at þat…, 2; svá kom um síðir því máli, at Sigvaldi, it came so far, that…, Fms. xi. 95, Edda 33. Rarely and unclass., ellipt. without svá; Bæringr var til seinn eptir honum, at hann … (= svá at), Bær. 15; hlífði honum, at hann sakaði ekki, Fas. iii. 441.
    II. it is used,
    1. with indic, in a narrative sense, answering partly to Gr. οτι, Lat. quod, ut, in such phrases as, it came to pass, happened that …; þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, Nj. 2; þat var á palmdrottinsdag, at Ólafr konungr gékk út um stræti, Fms. ii. 244.
    2. with subj. answering to Lat. acc. with infin., to mark the relation of an object to the chief verb, e. g. vilda ek at þú réðist, I wished that you would, Nj. 57.
    β. or in an oblique sentence, answering to ita ut…; ef svá kann verða at þeir láti…, if it may be so that they might…, Fms. xi. 94.
    γ. with a subj. denoting design, answering to ϊνα or Lat. ut with subj., in order that; at öll veraldar bygðin viti, ut sciat totus orbis, Stj.; þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, at þeir dæi eigi af sulti, ut ne fame perirent, Nj. 265; fyrsti hlutr bókarinnar er Kristindómsbálkr, at menn skili, in order that men may understand, Gþl. p. viii.
    III. used in connection with conjunctions,
    1. esp. þó, því, svá; þó at freq. contr. þótt; svát is rare and obsolete.
    α. þóat, þótt (North. E. ‘thof’), followed by a subjunctive, though, although, Lat. etsi, quamquam (very freq.); þóat nokkurum mönnum sýnist þetta með freku sett… þá viljum vér, Fms. vi. 21: phrases as, gef þú mér þó at úverðugri, etsi indignae (dat.), Stj. MS. col. 315, are unclass., and influenced by the Latin: sometimes ellipt. without ‘þó,’ eigi mundi hón þá meir hvata göngu sinni, at (= þóat) hon hraeddist bana sinn, Edda 7, Nj. 64: ‘þó’ and ‘at’ separated, svarar hann þó rétt, at hann svari svá, Grág. i. 23; þó er rétt at nýta, at hann sé fyrr skorinn, answering to Engl. yetthough, Lat. attamenetsi, K. Þ. K.
    β. því at, because, Lat. nam, quia, with indic.; því at allir vóru gerfiligir synir hans, Ld. 68; því at af íþróttum verðr maðr fróðr, Sks. 16: separated, því þegi ek, at ek undrumst, Fms. iii. 201; því er þessa getið, at þat þótti, it i s mentioned because …, Ld. 68.
    γ. svá at, so that, Lat. ut, ita ut; grátrinn kom upp, svá at eingi mátti öðrum segja, Edda 37: separated, so … that, svá úsvúst at …, so bad weather, that, Bs. i. 339, etc.
    2. it is freq. used superfluously, esp. after relatives; hver at = hverr, quis; því at = því, igitur; hverr at þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða, Fms. v. 159; hvern stvrk at hann mundi fá, 44; ek undrumst hvé mikil ógnarraust at liggr í þér, iii. 201; því at ek mátti eigi þar vera elligar, því at þar var kristni vel haldin, Fas. i. 340.
    IV. as a relat. conj.:
    1. temp, when, Lat. quum; jafnan er ( est) mér þá verra er ( quum) ek fer á braut þaðan, en þá at ( quum) ek kem, Grett. 150 A; þar til at vér vitum, till we know, Fms. v. 52; þá at ek lýsta (= þá er), when, Nj. 233.
    2. since, because; ek færi yðr (hann), at þér eruð í einum hrepp allir, because of your being all of the same Rape, Grág. i. 260; eigi er kynlegt at ( though) Skarphéðinn sé hraustr, at þat er mælt at…, because (since) it is a saying that…, Nj. 64.
    V. in mod. writers it is also freq. superfluously joined to the conjunctions, ef að = ef, si, (Lv. 45 is from a paper MS.), meðan að = meðan, dum; nema að, nisi; fyrst að = fyrst, quoniam; eptir að, síðan að, postquam; hvárt að = hvárt, Lat. an. In the law we find passages such as, þá er um er dæmt eina sök, at þá eigu þeir aptr at ganga í dóminn, Grág. i. 79; ef þing ber á hina helgu viku, at þat á eigi fyrir þeim málum at standa, 106; þat er ok, at þeir skulu reifa mál manna, 64; at þeir skulu með váttorð þá sök sækja, 65: in all these cases ‘at’ is either superfluous or, which is more likely, of an ellipt. nature, ‘the law decrees’ or ‘it is decreed’ being understood. The passages Sks. 551, 552, 568, 718 B, at lokit (= at ek hefi lokit), at hugleitt (= at ek hefi h.), at sent (= at ek hefi sent) are quite exceptional.
    4.
    and að, an indecl. relat. pronoun [Ulf. þatei = ος, ος αν, οστις, οσπερ, οιος, etc.; Engl. that, Ormul. at], with the initial letter dropped, as in the conj. at, (cp. also the Old Engl. at, which is both a conj. and a pronoun, e. g. Barbour vi. 24 in Jamieson: ‘I drede that his gret wassalage, | And his travail may bring till end, | That at men quhilc full litil wend.’ | ‘His mestyr speryt quhat tithings a t he saw.’—Wyntoun v. 3. 89.) In Icel. ‘er’ (the relat. pronoun) and ‘at’ are used indifferently, so that where one MS. reads ‘er,’ another reads ‘at,’ and vice versâ; this may easily be seen by looking at the MSS.; yet as a rule ‘er’ is much more freq. used. In mod. writers ‘at’ is freq. turned into ‘eð,’ esp. as a superfluous particle after the relative pron. hverr (hver eð, hvað eð, hverir eð, etc.), or the demonstr. sá (sá eð, þeir eð, hinir eð, etc.):—who, which, that, enn bezta grip at ( which) hafði til Íslands komið, Ld. 202; en engi mun sá at ( cui) minnisamara mun vera, 242; sem blótnaut at ( quae) stærst verða, Fms. iii. 214; þau tiðendi, at mér þætti verri, Nj. 64, etc. etc.
    5.
    n. collision (poët.); odda at, crossing of spears, crash of spears, Höfuðl. 8.
    β. a fight or bait of wild animals, esp. of horses, v. hesta-at and etja.
    6.
    the negative verbal suffix, v. -a.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > AT

  • 7 קום

    קוּם(b. h.) to stand up, rise; to stand, exist. Sifré Deut. 357 (ref. to Deut. 26:10) אבל באומות קָם וכ׳ but among the nations he (a prophet like Moses) has existed ; R. Hash. 21b בנביאים לא קםוכ׳ among the prophets never one arose like Moses, but among the rulers one did arise (Solomon). Tanḥ. Bshall. 16 שכל הַקָּם … כאילו קםוכ׳ whoever rises against Israel is considered as if he rose against the Shkhinah. Ib. (ref. to Ex. 15:7) הרבית … כל הקָּמִים לנגדך thou hast often shown thyself glorious over all that rose against thee; a. v. fr.קוּם עֲשֵׂה rise and do, a transgression of a prohibitive law which you must repair by an action, v. נָתַק. Ḥull.XII, 4. Macc.15b, v. infra; a. fr.V. קַיָּים. Pi. קִיֵּים 1) to establish; to attest, identify. Gitt.2b אין עדים מצויין לקַיְּימוֹ no witnesses are likely to be found to attest it (identify the signatures). Ib. 6a כולי עלמא בעינן לקיימו all agree that identifiation by witnesses is required. B. Mets.7a מודה בשטר … צריך לקיימו even if the debtor admits that he has written the note, the creditor must establish its identity (or else the debtor may maintain that the debt has been paid). Gitt.III, 4 וקיְּימוּ את דבריו and they sustained his opinion. Keth.20a אין מְקַיְּימִין … אלא משטרוכ׳ a document can be identified only by comparison of the signatures with those on a document that had been disputed and declared valid in court. Ib. אין מקיימין … משתי כתובותוכ׳ a document can be identified only by comparison of signatures with two marriage deeds or deeds of sale of two fields Ned.72a שמע וק׳ if he heard her vow and confirmed it. Y.R. Hash. I, 56c top קִיַּימְתִּיהָ כשחלוכ׳ I sustain that opinion for a case when ; a. fr.Part. pass. מְקוּיָּים. B. Mets. l. c. במק׳ דבריוכ׳ if the document has been identified, all agree ; a. e. 2) to fulfill, carry out, execute. Yoma 28b ק׳ אברהםוכ׳ Abraham fulfilled the whole Law. Macc. l. c. כל מצות … ק׳וכ׳ in the case of a transgression of a prohibitive law for which reparation is commanded, if the transgressor fulfills the prescribed reparation, he is free (from legal punishment), but if he made the reparation impossible Ib. ור״ש בן ל׳ קִיְּימוֹ ולא קִיְּימוֹ R. S. ben L. reads, if he makes reparation (he is free), and if he refuses, (he is punished); ib. 15a למאן דאמר ק׳ ולא ק׳ according to him who reads ḳiyymo vlo ḳiyymo (punishment can be executed as soon as one refuses to make reparation, although reparation is not made impossible); Ḥull.141a. Ab. IV, 9 … כל הַמְקַיֵּים לקַיְּימָהּ מעושר he who maintains (studies and observes) the Law in poverty, shall finally maintain it in wealth. Sot.13a sq. אמרו ק׳ זה כלוכ׳ they said, this one (Joseph in the coffin) has fulfilled what is written in this (the tablets in the ark of the covenant). Y.R. Hash. I, 57b top רצה מְקַיְּימָהּ if he so desires, he observes it (his own decree). Ber.9b ועבדום … ק׳ בהםוכ׳ the Lord fulfilled on them ‘and they shall make them serve (Gen. 15:14), but he did not fulfill on them ; a. v. fr. מה אני מקייםוכ׳ how can I maintain the words, i. e. in what way can this Scriptural verse which seems to conflict with my opinion be interpreted? R. Hash. 21b אלא מה אני מקיים ביקשוכ׳ and how do I interpret the verse biḳḳesh (Koh. 12:10)? Y.Kidd.I, 61c מה מקיים … בנים how does R. Elazar interpret banim (Deut. 14:1)?; a. fr. 3) to sustain, preserve alive, save. Snh.IV, 5 כל המקיים … כאילו ק׳וכ׳ he who saves one life … is considered … as if he had preserved the whole world; B. Bath.11a. Ab. V, 1 צדיקים שמקיימין את העילםוכ׳ the righteous who sustain the world which was created Kil. V, 8 המקיים קוצים בכרם he who keeps (cultivates) thorns in a vineyard. Ib. דבר שכמוהו מקיימין a plant of the kind that people are wont to cultivate; a. e. 4) to place ( on the chafing stove). Tosef.Sabb.III, 1 ואין מקיימין עליהוכ׳ (not לה) you must not place dishes on it, until it is swept or covered with ashes. Ib. 3; Y. ib. III, beg.5c; a. e. Hithpa. הִתְקַיֵּים, Nithpa. נִתְקַיֵּים 1) to be established, identified. Gitt.I, 3 יִתְקַיֵּים בחותמיו let the genuineness of the document be established through its signers (the witnesses subscribed or through others identifying their signatures); a. fr. 2) to be fulfilled, realized. Macc.24b עד שלא נִתְקַיְּימָה … שלא תִתְקַיֵּים נבואתווכ׳ is as long as the prophecy of Uriah (Mic. 3:12) was not fulfilled, I was afraid lest Zechariahs prophecy (Zech. 8:4) fail to come true; עכשיו שנתקיימה … מִהְקַיֶּימֶת now that Uriahs prophecy has been fulfilled, it is sure that Zechariahs will come true. Tosef.Snh.XI, 8; Y. ib. XI, 30a bot. וכולן נִתְקַיְּימוּ, v. מִדָּה. Ber.55a מקצתו מתקייםוכ׳ part of a dream may come true, but the whole of it will not. Midr. Till. to Ps. 1:3 מִתְקַיְּימוֹת are executed, v. עֵצָה II; a. fr. 3) to be preserved; to last, endure. Gitt.II, 3 בכל דבר שאינו מתקיים with any writing-ink which does not endure. Pes.68b אילמלא … לא נתקיימווכ׳ but for the Law, heaven and earth would not continue to exist. Taan.7a מה … מִתְקַיְּימִיןוכ׳ as these three liquids can he preserved only in the lowest kind of vessels, so will the words of the Law stay with him only whose mind is lowly. Erub.54a תלמודו מתק׳ בידו his learning will remain with him (in his memory). Shebi. VII, 2 מתק׳ בארץ plants the roots of which continue in the ground (perennials). Ab. IV, 11 כל כנסיה … סופה להִתְקַיֵּים every union for a sacred purpose is destined to last. Ib. V, 17 כל מחלוקת … סופה להתק׳ a contest for a sacred purpose is bound to have an enduring effect; a. fr. 4) to be maintained, be harmonised. Mekh. Mishp. s. 20 כיצד יִתְקַיְּימוּ שני מקראות הללו how can these two verses be harmonised?; a. fr. Hif. הֵקִים 1) to put up, erect. Ex. R. s. 52 בואו שנָקִיםוכ׳ come, for we will put up the Tabernacle. lb שרתה … והֵקִימוֹ the holy spirit came upon him, and he put it up. Tanḥ. Pḳudé 11 אני כותב עליך שאתה הֲקִימֹתוֹ I will record about thee, that thou didst put it up; a. fr. 2) to confirm ( a womans vow). Ned.67b איה׳ה׳ if he (the father) has confirmed it, it stands confirmed (the betrothed cannot annul it). Ib. 69a יש שאלה בהָקֵם can a confirmation (by one of the two, the father or the husband) be reconsidered? (v. שְׁאֵלָה), v. הָקֵם; a. e. Hof. הוּקַם to be put up. Tanḥ. l. c. כיון שה׳ המשכן מידוכ׳ as soon as the Tabernacle was erected, the Divine Presence came down Tanḥ. Naso 23. Num. R. s. 12; a. fr.

    Jewish literature > קום

  • 8 קוּם

    קוּם(b. h.) to stand up, rise; to stand, exist. Sifré Deut. 357 (ref. to Deut. 26:10) אבל באומות קָם וכ׳ but among the nations he (a prophet like Moses) has existed ; R. Hash. 21b בנביאים לא קםוכ׳ among the prophets never one arose like Moses, but among the rulers one did arise (Solomon). Tanḥ. Bshall. 16 שכל הַקָּם … כאילו קםוכ׳ whoever rises against Israel is considered as if he rose against the Shkhinah. Ib. (ref. to Ex. 15:7) הרבית … כל הקָּמִים לנגדך thou hast often shown thyself glorious over all that rose against thee; a. v. fr.קוּם עֲשֵׂה rise and do, a transgression of a prohibitive law which you must repair by an action, v. נָתַק. Ḥull.XII, 4. Macc.15b, v. infra; a. fr.V. קַיָּים. Pi. קִיֵּים 1) to establish; to attest, identify. Gitt.2b אין עדים מצויין לקַיְּימוֹ no witnesses are likely to be found to attest it (identify the signatures). Ib. 6a כולי עלמא בעינן לקיימו all agree that identifiation by witnesses is required. B. Mets.7a מודה בשטר … צריך לקיימו even if the debtor admits that he has written the note, the creditor must establish its identity (or else the debtor may maintain that the debt has been paid). Gitt.III, 4 וקיְּימוּ את דבריו and they sustained his opinion. Keth.20a אין מְקַיְּימִין … אלא משטרוכ׳ a document can be identified only by comparison of the signatures with those on a document that had been disputed and declared valid in court. Ib. אין מקיימין … משתי כתובותוכ׳ a document can be identified only by comparison of signatures with two marriage deeds or deeds of sale of two fields Ned.72a שמע וק׳ if he heard her vow and confirmed it. Y.R. Hash. I, 56c top קִיַּימְתִּיהָ כשחלוכ׳ I sustain that opinion for a case when ; a. fr.Part. pass. מְקוּיָּים. B. Mets. l. c. במק׳ דבריוכ׳ if the document has been identified, all agree ; a. e. 2) to fulfill, carry out, execute. Yoma 28b ק׳ אברהםוכ׳ Abraham fulfilled the whole Law. Macc. l. c. כל מצות … ק׳וכ׳ in the case of a transgression of a prohibitive law for which reparation is commanded, if the transgressor fulfills the prescribed reparation, he is free (from legal punishment), but if he made the reparation impossible Ib. ור״ש בן ל׳ קִיְּימוֹ ולא קִיְּימוֹ R. S. ben L. reads, if he makes reparation (he is free), and if he refuses, (he is punished); ib. 15a למאן דאמר ק׳ ולא ק׳ according to him who reads ḳiyymo vlo ḳiyymo (punishment can be executed as soon as one refuses to make reparation, although reparation is not made impossible); Ḥull.141a. Ab. IV, 9 … כל הַמְקַיֵּים לקַיְּימָהּ מעושר he who maintains (studies and observes) the Law in poverty, shall finally maintain it in wealth. Sot.13a sq. אמרו ק׳ זה כלוכ׳ they said, this one (Joseph in the coffin) has fulfilled what is written in this (the tablets in the ark of the covenant). Y.R. Hash. I, 57b top רצה מְקַיְּימָהּ if he so desires, he observes it (his own decree). Ber.9b ועבדום … ק׳ בהםוכ׳ the Lord fulfilled on them ‘and they shall make them serve (Gen. 15:14), but he did not fulfill on them ; a. v. fr. מה אני מקייםוכ׳ how can I maintain the words, i. e. in what way can this Scriptural verse which seems to conflict with my opinion be interpreted? R. Hash. 21b אלא מה אני מקיים ביקשוכ׳ and how do I interpret the verse biḳḳesh (Koh. 12:10)? Y.Kidd.I, 61c מה מקיים … בנים how does R. Elazar interpret banim (Deut. 14:1)?; a. fr. 3) to sustain, preserve alive, save. Snh.IV, 5 כל המקיים … כאילו ק׳וכ׳ he who saves one life … is considered … as if he had preserved the whole world; B. Bath.11a. Ab. V, 1 צדיקים שמקיימין את העילםוכ׳ the righteous who sustain the world which was created Kil. V, 8 המקיים קוצים בכרם he who keeps (cultivates) thorns in a vineyard. Ib. דבר שכמוהו מקיימין a plant of the kind that people are wont to cultivate; a. e. 4) to place ( on the chafing stove). Tosef.Sabb.III, 1 ואין מקיימין עליהוכ׳ (not לה) you must not place dishes on it, until it is swept or covered with ashes. Ib. 3; Y. ib. III, beg.5c; a. e. Hithpa. הִתְקַיֵּים, Nithpa. נִתְקַיֵּים 1) to be established, identified. Gitt.I, 3 יִתְקַיֵּים בחותמיו let the genuineness of the document be established through its signers (the witnesses subscribed or through others identifying their signatures); a. fr. 2) to be fulfilled, realized. Macc.24b עד שלא נִתְקַיְּימָה … שלא תִתְקַיֵּים נבואתווכ׳ is as long as the prophecy of Uriah (Mic. 3:12) was not fulfilled, I was afraid lest Zechariahs prophecy (Zech. 8:4) fail to come true; עכשיו שנתקיימה … מִהְקַיֶּימֶת now that Uriahs prophecy has been fulfilled, it is sure that Zechariahs will come true. Tosef.Snh.XI, 8; Y. ib. XI, 30a bot. וכולן נִתְקַיְּימוּ, v. מִדָּה. Ber.55a מקצתו מתקייםוכ׳ part of a dream may come true, but the whole of it will not. Midr. Till. to Ps. 1:3 מִתְקַיְּימוֹת are executed, v. עֵצָה II; a. fr. 3) to be preserved; to last, endure. Gitt.II, 3 בכל דבר שאינו מתקיים with any writing-ink which does not endure. Pes.68b אילמלא … לא נתקיימווכ׳ but for the Law, heaven and earth would not continue to exist. Taan.7a מה … מִתְקַיְּימִיןוכ׳ as these three liquids can he preserved only in the lowest kind of vessels, so will the words of the Law stay with him only whose mind is lowly. Erub.54a תלמודו מתק׳ בידו his learning will remain with him (in his memory). Shebi. VII, 2 מתק׳ בארץ plants the roots of which continue in the ground (perennials). Ab. IV, 11 כל כנסיה … סופה להִתְקַיֵּים every union for a sacred purpose is destined to last. Ib. V, 17 כל מחלוקת … סופה להתק׳ a contest for a sacred purpose is bound to have an enduring effect; a. fr. 4) to be maintained, be harmonised. Mekh. Mishp. s. 20 כיצד יִתְקַיְּימוּ שני מקראות הללו how can these two verses be harmonised?; a. fr. Hif. הֵקִים 1) to put up, erect. Ex. R. s. 52 בואו שנָקִיםוכ׳ come, for we will put up the Tabernacle. lb שרתה … והֵקִימוֹ the holy spirit came upon him, and he put it up. Tanḥ. Pḳudé 11 אני כותב עליך שאתה הֲקִימֹתוֹ I will record about thee, that thou didst put it up; a. fr. 2) to confirm ( a womans vow). Ned.67b איה׳ה׳ if he (the father) has confirmed it, it stands confirmed (the betrothed cannot annul it). Ib. 69a יש שאלה בהָקֵם can a confirmation (by one of the two, the father or the husband) be reconsidered? (v. שְׁאֵלָה), v. הָקֵם; a. e. Hof. הוּקַם to be put up. Tanḥ. l. c. כיון שה׳ המשכן מידוכ׳ as soon as the Tabernacle was erected, the Divine Presence came down Tanḥ. Naso 23. Num. R. s. 12; a. fr.

    Jewish literature > קוּם

  • 9 अग्निः _agniḥ

    अग्निः [अङ्गति ऊर्ध्वं गच्छति अङ्ग्-नि,नलोपश्च Uṇ.4.5., or fr. अञ्च् 'to go.']
    1 Fire कोप˚, चिन्ता˚, शोक˚, ज्ञान˚, राज˚, &c.
    -2 The God of fire.
    -3 Sacrificial fire of three kinds (गार्हपत्य, आहवनीय and दक्षिण); पिता बै गार्हपत्यो$ ग्निर्माताग्निर्दक्षिणः स्मृतः । गुरुराहवनीयस्तु साग्नित्रेता गरीयसी ॥ Ms. 2.232.
    -4 The fire of the stomach, digestive faculty, gastric fluid.
    -5 Bile (नाभेरूर्ध्व हृदयादधस्तादामाशयमाचक्षते तद्गतं सौरं तेजः पित्तम् इत्याचक्षते).
    -6 Cauterization (अग्नि- कर्मन्).
    -7 Gold.
    -8 The number three. शराग्निपरिमाणम् (पञ्चत्रिंशत्) Mb.13.17.26.
    -9 N. of various plants: (a) चित्रक Plumbago Zeylanica; (b) रक्तचित्रक; (c) भल्लातक Semicarpus Anacardium; (d) निम्बक Citrus Acida.
    -1 A mystical substitute for the letter र्. In Dvandva comp. as first member with names of deities, and with particular words अग्नि is changed to अग्ना, as ˚विष्णू, ˚मरुतौ, or to अग्नी, ˚पर्जन्यौ, ˚ वरुणौ, ˚षोमौ
    -11 पिङगला नाडी; यत्र तद् ब्रह्म निर्द्वन्द्वं यत्र सोमः, (इडा) सहाग्निना (अग्निः पिङ्गला) Mb.14.2.1.
    -12 Sacrificial altar, अग्निकुण्ड cf. Rām. 1.14.28.
    -13 Sky. अग्निर्मूर्धा Muṇḍ 2.1.4. [cf. L. ignis.
    [Agni is the God of Fire, the Ignis of the Latins and Ogni of the Slavonians. He is one of the most prominent deities of the Ṛigveda. He, as an immortal, has taken up his abode among mortals as their guest; he is the domestic priest, the successful accomplisher and protector of all ceremonies; he is also the religious leader and preceptor of the gods, a swift messenger employed to announce to the immortals the hymns and to convey to them the oblations of their worshippers, and to bring them down from the sky to the place of sacrifice. He is sometimes regarded as the mouth and the tongue through which both gods and men participate in the sacrifices. He is the lord, protector and leader of people, monarch of men, the lord of the house, friendly to mankind, and like a father, mother, brother &c. He is represented as being produced by the attrition of two pieces of fuel which are regarded as husband and wife. Sometimes he is considered to have been brought down from heaven or generated by Indra between two clouds or stones, created by Dyau, or fashioned by the gods collectively. In some passages he is represented as having a triple existence, which may mean his three- fold manifestations as the sun in heaven, lightning in the atmosphere, and as ordinary fire on the earth, although the three appearances are also elsewhere otherwise explained. His epithets are numberless and for the most part descriptive of his physical characteristics: धूमकेतु, हुतभुज्, शुचि, रोहिताश्व, सप्तजिह्व, तोमरधर, घृतान्न, चित्रभानु, ऊर्ध्वशोचिस्, शोचिष्केश, हरिकेश, हिरण्यदन्त, अयोदंष्ट्र &c. In a celebrated passage he is said to have 4 horns, 3 feet, 2 heads, and 7 hands. The highest divine functions are ascribed to Agni. He is said to have spread out the two worlds and + produced them, to have supported heaven, formed the mundane regions and luminaries of heaven, to have begotten Mitra and caused the sun to ascend the sky. He is the head and summit of the sky, the centre of the earth. Earth, Heaven and all beings obey his commands. He knows and sees all worlds or creatures and witnesses all their actions. The worshippers of Agni prosper, they are wealthy and live long. He is the protector of that man who takes care to bring him fuel. He gives him riches and no one can overcome him who sacrifices to this god. He confers, and is the guardian of, immortality. He is like a water-trough in a desert and all blessing issue from him. He is therefore constantly supplicated for all kinds of boons, riches, food, deliverance from enemies and demons, poverty, reproach, childlessness, hunger &c. Agni is also associated with Indra in different hymns and the two gods are said to be twin brothers.
    Such is the Vedic conception of Agni; but in the course of mythological personifications he appears as the eldest son of Brahmā and is called Abhimānī [Viṣṇu Purāṇa]. His wife was Svāhā; by her, he had 3 sons - Pāvaka, Pavamāna and Śuchi; and these had forty-five sons; altogether 49 persons who are considered identical with the 49 fires. He is also represented as a son of Aṅgiras, as a king of the Pitṛs or Manes, as a Marut and as a grandson of Śāṇḍila, and also as a star. The Harivaṁśa describes him as clothed in black, having smoke for his standard and head-piece and carrying a flaming javelin. He is borne in a chariot drawn by red horses and the 7 winds are the wheels of his car. He is accompanied by a ram and sometimes he is represented as riding on that animal. Agni was appointed by Brahamā as the sovereign of the quarter between the south and east, whence the direction is still known as Āgneyī. The Mahābhārata represents Agni as having exhausted his vigour and become dull by devouring many oblations at the several sacrifices made by king Śvetaki, but he recruited his strength by devouring the whole Khāṇḍava forest; for the story see the word खाण्डव].
    -Comp. -अ (आ) गारम् -रः, -आलयः, -गृहम् [अग्निकार्याय अगारम् शाक˚ त.] a fire- sanctuary, house or place for keeping the sacred fire; वसंश्चतुर्थो$ग्निरिवाग्न्यगारे R.5.25. रथाग्न्यगारं चापार्चीं शरशक्तिगदे- न्धनम् Mb.11.25.14.
    -अस्त्रम् fire-missile, a rocket,
    -आत्मक a. [अग्निरात्मा यस्य] of the nature of fire सोमा- त्मिका स्त्री, ˚कः पुमान्.
    -आधानम् consecrating the fire; so ˚आहिति.
    -आधेयः [अग्निराधेयो येन] a Brāhmana who maintains the sacred fire. (
    -यम्) =
    ˚आधानम्. -आहितः [अग्निराहितो येन, वा परनिपातः P.II.2.37.] one who maintains the sacred fire; See आहिताग्नि.
    -इध् m. (अग्नीध्रः) [अग्निम् इन्द्धे स अग्नीध्] the priest who kindles fire (mostly Ved).
    -इन्धनः [अग्निरिध्यते अनेन] N. of a Mantra. (नम्) kindling the fire; अग्नीन्धनं भैक्षचर्याम् Ms.2.18.
    -उत्पातः [अग्निना दिव्यानलेन कृतः उत्पातः] a fiery portent, meteor, comet &c. In Bṛ. S.33 it is said to be of five kinds: दिवि भुक्तशुभफलानां पततां रूपाणि यानि तान्युल्काः । धिष्ण्योल्का- शनिविद्युत्तारा इति पञ्चधा भिन्नाः ॥ उल्का पक्षेण फलं तद्वत् धिष्ण्याशनिस्त्रिभिः पक्षैः । विद्युदहोभिः ष़ड्भिस्तद्वत्तारा विपाचयति ॥ Different fruits are said to result from the appearances of these portents, according to the nature of their colour, position &c.
    -उद्धरणम्, -उद्धारः 1 producing fire by the friction of two araṇis.
    -2 taking out, before sun-rise, the sacred fire from its cover of ashes previous to a sacrifice.
    -उपस्थानम् worship of Agni; the Mantra or hymn with which Agni is worshipped (अग्निरुपस्थीयते$नेन) अग्निस्त्रिष्टुभ् उपस्थाने विनियोगः Sandhyā.
    -एधः [अग्निमेधयति] an incendiary.
    -कणः; -स्तोकः a spark.
    -कर्मन् n. [अग्नौ कर्म स. त.]
    1 cauterization.
    -2 action of fire.
    -3 oblation to Agni, worship of Agni (अग्निहोत्र); so ˚कार्य offering oblations to fire, feeding fire with ghee &c.; निर्वर्तिताग्निकार्यः K.16.; ˚र्यार्धदग्ध 39, Ms.3.69, अग्निकार्यं ततः कुर्यात्सन्ध्ययोरुभयोरपि । Y.1.25.
    -कला a part (or appearance) of fire; ten varieties are mentioned धूम्रार्चिरुष्मा ज्वलिनी ज्वालिनी विस्फु- लिङ्गिनी । सुश्री: सुरूपा कपिला हव्यकव्यवहे अपि ॥ यादीनां दश- वर्णानां कला धर्मप्रदा अमूः ।).
    -कारिका [अग्निं करोति आधत्ते करणे कर्तृत्वोपचारात् कर्तरि ण्वुल्]
    1 the means of consecrating the sacred fire, the Ṛik called अग्नीध्र which begins with अग्निं दूतं पुरो दधे. 2. = अग्निकार्यम्.
    -काष्ठम् अग्नेः उद्दीपनं काष्ठं शाक ˚त.] agallochum (अगुरु)
    -कुक्कुटः [अग्नेः कुक्कुट इव रक्तवर्णस्फुलिङ्गत्वात्] a firebrand, lighted wisp of straw.
    -कुण्डम [अग्नेराधानार्थं कुण्डम्] an enclosed space for keeping the fire, a fire-vessel.
    -कुमारः, -तनयः; सुतः 1 N. of Kārttikeya said to be born from fire; Rām.7. See कार्त्तिकेय.
    -2 a kind of preparation of medicinal drugs.
    -कृतः Cashew-nut; the plant Anacardium occidentale. [Mar.काजू]
    -केतुः [अग्नेः केतुरिव]
    1 smoke.
    -2 N. of two Rākṣasas on the side of Rāvaṇa and killed by Rāma.
    -कोणः -दिक् the south-east corner ruled over by Agni; इन्द्रो वह्निः पितृपतिर्नौर्ऋतो वरुणो मरुत् । कुबेर ईशः पतयः पूर्वादीनां दिशां क्रमात् ॥
    -क्रिया [अग्निना निर्वर्तिता क्रिया, शाक. त.]
    1 obsequies, funeral ceremonies.
    -2 branding; भेषजाग्निक्रियासु च Y.3.284.
    -क्रीडा [तृ. त.] fire-works, illuminations.
    -गर्भ a. [अग्निर्गर्भे यस्य] pregnant with or containing fire, having fire in the interior; ˚र्भां शमीमिव Ś 4.3. (
    --र्भः) [अग्निरिव जारको गर्भो यस्य]
    1 N. of the plant Agnijāra.
    -2 the sun stone, name of a crystal supposed to contain and give out fire when touched by the rays of the sun; cf Ś2.7.
    -3 the sacrificial stick अरणि which when churned, gives out fire.
    (-र्भा) 1 N. of the Śamī plant as containing fire (the story of how Agni was discovered to exist in the interior of the Śamī plant is told in chap. 35 of अनु- शासनपर्व in Mb.)
    -2 N. of the earth (अग्नेः सकाशात् गर्भो यस्यां सा; when the Ganges threw the semen of Śiva out on the Meru mountain, whatever on earth &c. was irradiated by its lustre, became gold and the earth was thence called वसुमती)
    -3 N. of the plant महा- ज्योतिष्मती लता (अग्निरिव गर्भो मध्यभागो यस्याः सा) [Mar. माल- कांगोणी]
    -ग्रन्थः [अग्निप्रतिपादको ग्रन्थः शाक. त.] the work that treats of the worship of Agni &c.
    -घृतम् [अग्न्युद्दीपनं घृतं शाक. त.] a kind of medicinal preparation of ghee used to stimulate the digestive power.
    -चित् m. अग्निं चितवान्; चि-भूतार्थे क्विप् P.III.2.91] one who has kept the sacred fire; यतिभिः सार्धमनग्निमग्निचित् R.8.25; अध्वरे- ष्वग्निचित्वत्सु Bk.5.11.
    -चयः, -चयनम्, -चित्या. arranging or keeping the sacred fire (अग्न्याधान); चित्याग्निचित्ये च P.III.1.132.
    -2 (
    -यः, -यनः) the Mantra used in this operation.
    -3 a heap of fire
    -चित्वत् [अग्निचयनम् अस्त्यस्मिन् मतुप्; मस्य वः । तान्तत्वान्न पद- त्वम् Tv.] having अग्निचयन or अग्निचित्.
    -चूडः A bird having a red tuft.
    -चर्णम् gunpowder. कार्यासमर्थः कत्यस्ति शस्त्रगोलाग्निचूर्णयुक् Śukranīti 2.93.
    -ज, -जात a. produced by or from fire, born from fire.
    (-जः, -जातः) 1 N. of the plant अग्निजार (अग्नये अग्न्युद्दीपनाय जायते सेवनात् प्रभवति).
    1 N. of Kārttikeya पराभिनत्क्रौञ्चमिवाद्रिमग्निजः Mb.8.9. 68.3. Viṣṇu. (
    -जम्, -जातम) gold; so ˚जन्मन्.
    -जित् m. God; Bhāg.8.14.4.
    -जिह्व a.
    1 having a fiery tongue.
    -2 one having fire for the tongue, epithet of a God or of Visṇu in the boar incarnation. (
    -ह्वा)
    1 a tongue or flame of fire.
    -2 one of the 7 tongues of Agni (कराली धूमिनी श्वेता लोहिता नीललोहिता । सुवर्णा पद्मरागा च जिह्वा: सप्त विभावसोः
    -3 N. of a plant लाङ्गली (अग्नेर्जिह्वेव शिखा यस्याः सा); of another plant (जलपिप्पली) or गजपिप्पली (विषलाङ्गला) (Mar. जल-गज पिंपळी)
    -ज्वाला 1 the flame or glow of fire.
    -2 [अग्नेर्ज्वालेव शिखा यस्याः सा] N. of a plant with red blossoms, chiefly used by dyers, Grislea Tomentosa (Mar. धायफूल, धायटी).
    -तप् a. [अग्निना तप्यते; तप्-क्विप्] having the warmth of fire; practising austerities by means of fire.
    -तपस् a. [अग्निभिः तप्यते]
    1 practising very aus- tere penance, standing in the midst of the five fires.
    -2 glowing, shining or burning like fire (तपतीति तपाः अग्निरिव तपाः) hot as fire
    -तेजस् a. having the lustre or power of fire. (अग्नेरिव तेजो यस्य). (
    -स् n.) the lustre of fire. (
    -स् m.) N. of one of the 7 Ṛiṣis of the 11th Manvantara.
    -त्रयम् the three fires, See under अग्नि.
    - a. [अग्निं दाहार्थं गृहादौ ददाति; दा. -क.]
    1 giving or supplying with fire
    -2 tonic, stomachic, producing appetite, stimulating digestion.
    -3 incendiary; अग्निदान् भक्तदांश्चैव Ms.9.278; अग्निदानां च ये लोकाः Y.2.74; so ˚दायक, ˚दायिन्. यदग्निदायके पापं यत्पापं गुरुतल्पगे. Rām.2.75.45.
    -दग्ध a.
    1 burnt on the funeral pile; अग्निदग्धाश्च ये जीवा ये$प्यदग्धाः कुले मम Vāyu. P.
    -2 burnt with fire.
    -3 burnt at once without having fire put into the mouth, being destitute of issue (?); (pl.) a class of Manes or Pitṛis who, when alive, kept up the household flame and presented oblations to fire.
    -दमनी [अग्निर्दम्यते$नया; दम्-णिच् करणे ल्युट] a narcotic plant, Solanum Jacquini. [Mar. रिंगणी]
    -दातृ [अग्निं विधानेन ददाति] one who performs the last (funeral) ceremonies of a man; यश्चाग्निदाता प्रेतस्य पिण्डं दद्यात्स एव हि.
    -दीपन a. [अग्निं दीपयति] stimulating digestion, stomachic, tonic.
    -दीप्त a. [तृ. त्त.] glowing, set on fire, blazing (
    -प्ता) [अग्निर्जठरानलो दीप्तः सेवनात् यस्याः सा] N. of a plant ज्योतिष्मती लता (Mar. मालकांगोणी), which is said to stimulate digestion.
    -दीप्तिः f. active state of digestion.
    -दूत a. अग्निर्दूत इव यस्मिन् यस्य वा] having Agni for a messenger, said of the sacrifice or the deity invoked; यमं ह यज्ञो गच्छत्यग्निदूतो अरंकृतः Rv.1.14.13.
    -दूषितः a. branded.
    -देवः [अग्नि- रेव देवः] Agni; a worshipper of Agni.
    -देवा [अग्निर्देवो यस्याः] the third lunar mansion, the Pleiades (कृत्तिका).
    -द्वारम् the door on the south-east of a building; पूर्व- द्वारमथैशाने चाग्निद्वारं तु दक्षिणे । Māna.9.294-95.
    -धानम् [अग्निर्धियते$स्मिन्] the place or receptacle for keeping the sacred fire, the house of अग्निहोतृ; पदं कृणुते अग्निधाने Rv. 1.165.3.
    -धारणम् maintaining the sacred fire; व्रतिनां ˚णम् K. 55.
    -नयनम् = ˚प्रणयनम्.
    -निर्यासः [अग्नेर्ज- ठरानलस्येव दीपको निर्यासो यस्य] N. of the plant अग्निजार.
    -नेत्र a. [अग्निर्नेता यस्य] having Agni for the leader or conveyer of oblations, an epithet of a god in general.
    -पदम् 1 the word Agni.
    -2 fire-place.
    -3 N. of a plant.
    -परिक्रि-ष्क्रि-या care of the sacred fire, worship of fire, offering oblations; गृहार्थो$ग्निपरिष्क्रिया Ms.2.67.
    -परिच्छदः the whole sacrificial apparatus; गृह्यं चाग्निपरिच्छदम् Ms.6. 4.
    -परिधानम् enclosing the sacrificial fire with a kind of screen.
    -परीक्षा [तृ. त.] ordeal by fire.
    -पर्वतः [अग्निसाधनं पर्वतः] a volcano; महता ज्वलता नित्यमग्निमेवाग्नि- पर्वतः Rām.5.35.43.
    -पुच्छः [अग्नेः अग्न्याधानस्थानस्य पुच्छ इव]. tail or back part of the sacrificial place; the extinction of fire.
    -पुराणम् [अग्निना प्रोक्तं पुराणम्] one of the 18 Purāṇas ascribed to Vyāsa. It derives its name from its having been communicated originally by Agni to the sage Vasiṣṭha for the purpose of instructing him in the two-fold knowledge of Brahman. Its stanzas are said to be 145. Its contents are varied. It has portions on ritual and mystic worship, cosmical descriptions, chapters on the duties of Kings and the art of war, a chapter on law, some chapters on Medicine and some treatises on Rhetoric, Prosody, Grammar, Yoga, Brahmavidyā &c. &c.
    -प्रणयनम् bringing out the sacrificial fire and consecrating it according to the proper ritual.
    -प्रणिधिः Incendiary. Dk.2.8.
    -प्रतिष्ठा consecration of fire, especially the nuptial fire.
    -प्रवेशः; -शनम [स. त.] entering the fire, self-immolation of a widow on the funeral pile of her husband.
    -प्रस्कन्दनम् violation of the duties of a sacrificer (अग्निहोमाकरण); ˚परस्त्वं चाप्येवं भविष्यसि Mb.1.84.26.
    -प्रस्तरः [अग्निं प्रस्तृणाति अग्नेः प्रस्तरो वा] a flint, a stone producing fire.
    -बाहुः [अग्ने- र्बाहुरिव दीर्घशिखत्वात्]
    1 smoke.
    -2 N. of a son of the first Manu; Hariv. N. of a son of Priyavrata and Kāmyā. V. P.
    -बीजम् 1 the seed of Agni; (fig.) gold (रुद्रतेजः समुद्भूतं हेमबीजं विभावसोः)
    -2 N. of the letter र्.
    -भम [अग्नि- रिव भाति; भा-क.]
    1 'shining like fire,' gold.
    -2 N. of the constellation कृत्तिका.
    -भु n. [अग्नेर्भवति; भू-क्विप् ह्रस्वान्तः]
    1 water.
    -2 gold.
    -भू a. [अग्नेर्भवतिः भू-क्विप्] produced from fire.
    (भूः) 1 'fire-born,' N. of Kārttikeya.
    -2 N. of a teacher (काश्यप) who was taught by Agni.
    -3 (arith.) six.
    -भूति a. produced from fire. (
    -तिः) [अग्निरिव भूतिरैश्वर्यं यस्य] N. of a pupil of the last Tīrthaṅkara. (
    -तिः) f. the lustre or might of fire.
    -भ्राजस् a. Ved. [अग्निरिव भ्राजते; भ्राज्-असुन्] shining like fire. अग्निभ्राजसो विद्युतः Ṛv.5.54.11.
    -मणिः [अग्नेरुत्थापको मणिः शाक. त.] the sunstone.
    -मथ् m. [अग्निं मथ्नाति निष्पादयति; मन्थ्-क्विप्- नलोपः]
    1 the sacrificer who churns the fuel-stick.
    -2 the Mantra used in this operation, on the अरणि itself.
    -मन्थः, -न्थनम्, producing fire by friction; or the Mantra used in this operation. (
    -न्थः) [अग्निर्मथ्यते अनेन मन्थ्-करणे घञ्] N. of a tree गणिकारिका (Mar. नरवेल) Premna Spinosa (तत्काष्ठयोर्घर्षणे हि आशु वह्निरुत्पद्यते),
    -मान्द्यम् slowness of digestion, loss of appetite, dyspepsia.
    -मारुतिः अग्निश्च मरुच्च तयोरपत्यं इञ् ततो वृद्धिः इत् च; द्विपदवृद्धौ पृषो. पूर्वपदस्य ह्रस्वः Tv.] N. of the sage Agastya.
    -मित्रः N. of a king of the Śunga dynasty, son of Puṣypamitra who must have flourished before 15 B. C. -the usually accepted date of Patañjali-as the latter mentions पुष्यमित्र by name.
    -मुखः a. having Agni at the head. (
    -खः) [अग्निर्मुखमिव यस्य]
    1 a deity, god, (for the gods receive oblations through Agni who is, therefore, said to be their mouth; अग्निमुखा वै देवाः; अग्निर्मुखं प्रथमं देवतानाम् &c; or अग्निर्मुखे अग्रे येषाम्, for fire is said to have been created before all other gods.)
    -2 [अग्निर्मुखं प्रधानमुपास्यो यस्य] one who maintains the sacred fire (अग्निहोतृद्विज)
    -3 a Brāhmaṇa in general (अग्निर्दाहकत्वात् शापाग्निर्मुखे यस्य for Brāhmaṇas are said to be वाग्वज्राः).
    -4 N. of two plants चित्रक Plumbago Zeylanica and भल्लातक Semicarpus Anacardium अग्निरिव स्पर्शात् दुःखदायकं मुखमग्रम् यस्य, तन्निर्यासस्पर्शेन हि देहे क्षतोत्पत्तेस्थयोस्तथात्वम्)
    -5 a sort of powder or चूर्ण prescribed as a tonic by चक्रदत्त
    -6 'fire- mouthed, sharp-biting, an epithet of a bug. Pt. 1. (
    -खी) अग्निरिव मुखमग्रं यस्याः; गौरादि-ङीष्]
    1 N. of a plant भल्लातक (Mar. बिबवा, भिलावा) and लाङ्गलिका (विषलाङ्गला).
    -2 N. of the Gāyatri Mantra (अग्निरेव मुखं मुखत्वेन कल्पितं यस्याः सा, or अग्नेरिव मुखं प्रजापतिमुखं उत्पत्ति- द्वारं यस्याः, अग्निना समं प्रजापतिमुखजातत्वात्; कदाचिदपि नो विद्वान् गायत्रीमुदके जपेत् । गायत्र्याग्निमुखी यस्मात्तस्मादुत्थाय तां जपेत् ॥ गोभिल).
    -3 a kitchen [पाकशाला अग्निरिव उत्तप्तं मुखं यस्याः सा].
    -मूढ a. [तृ. त.] Ved. made insane or stupefied by lightning or fire.
    -यन्त्रम् A gun अग्नियन्त्रधरैश्चक्रधरैश्च पुरुषैर्वृतः Śivabhārata 12.17.
    -यानम् An aeroplane. व्योमयानं विमानं स्यात् अग्नियानं तदेव हि । अगस्त्यसंहिता.
    -योगः See पञ्चाग्निसाधन. अग्नियोगवहो ग्रीष्मे विधिदृष्टेन कर्मणा । चीर्त्वा द्वादशवर्षाणि राजा भवति पार्थिवः ॥ Mb.13.14,2.43.
    -योजनम् causing the sacrificial fire to blaze up.
    -रक्षणम् 1 con- secrating or preserving the sacred (domestic) fire or अग्निहोत्र.
    -2 [अग्निः रक्ष्यते अनेन अत्र वा] a Mantra securing for Agni protection from evil spirits &c.
    -3 the house of an अग्निहोतृ.
    -रजः, -रजस् m. [अग्निरिव रज्यते दीप्यते; रञ्ज्-असुन् नलोपः]
    1 a scarlet insect by name इन्द्रगोप.
    -2 (अग्नेः रजः) the might or power of Agni.
    -3 gold. Mb.3. 16.86.7
    -रहस्यम् mystery of (worshipping &c.) Agni; N. of the tenth book of Śatapatha Brāhmaṇa.
    -राशिः a heap of fire, burning pile.
    -रुहा [अग्निरिव रोहति रुह्-क] N. of the plant मांसादनी or मांसरोहिणी (तदङ्कुरस्य वह्नितुल्य- वर्णतया उत्पन्नत्वात्तथात्वं तस्याः).
    -रूप a. [अग्नेरिव रूपं वर्णो यस्य] fire-shaped; of the nature of fire.
    -रूपम् the nature of fire.
    -रेतस् n. the seed of Agni; (hence) gold.
    -रोहिणी [अग्निरिव रोहति; रुह्-णिनि] a hard inflammatory swelling in the armpit.
    -लोकः the world a Agni, which is situated below the summit of Meru; in the Purāṇas it is said to be in the अन्तरिक्ष, while in the Kāśī Khaṇḍa it is said to be to the south of इन्द्रपुरी; एतस्या दक्षिणे भागे येयं पूर्दृश्यते शुभा । इमामर्चिष्मतीं पश्य वीतिहोत्रपुरीं शुभाम् ॥
    -वधूः Svāhā, the daughter of Dakṣa and wife of Agni
    -वर्चस् a. [अग्नेर्वर्च इव वर्चो यस्य] glowing or bright like fire. (n.) the lustre of Agni. (-m.) N. of a teacher of the Purāṇas.
    -वर्ण a. [अग्नेरिव वर्णो यस्य] of the colour of fire; hot; fiery; सुरां पीत्वा द्विजो मोहादग्निवर्णां सुरां पिबेत् Ms.11.9; गोमूत्रमग्निवर्णं वा पिबेदुदकमेव वा 91.
    (र्णः) 1 N. of a prince, son of Sudarśana.
    -2 N. of a King of the solar race, See R.19.1. the colour of fire. (
    -र्णा) a strong liquor.
    -वर्धक a. stimulating digestion, tonic.
    (-कः) 1 a tonic.
    -2 regimen, diet (पथ्याहार).
    -वल्लभः [अग्नेर्वल्लभः सुखेन दाह्यत्वात्]
    1 the Śāla tree, Shorea Robusta.
    -2 the resinous juice of it.
    -वासस् a. [अग्निरिव शुद्धं वासो यस्य] having a red (pure like Agni) garment. (n.) a pure garment.
    -वाह a. [अग्निं वाहयति अनुमापयति वा]
    1 smoke.
    -2 a goat.
    -वाहनम् a goat (छाग).
    -विद् m.
    1 one who knows the mystery about Agni.
    -2 an अग्निहोत्रिन् q. v.
    -विमोचनम् ceremony of lowering the sacrificial fire.
    -विसर्पः pain from an inflamed tumour, inflammation.
    -विहरणम्, -विहारः 1 taking the sacrificial fire from आग्नीध्र to the उत्तरवेदि.
    -2 offering oblations to fire; प्रत्यासन्ना ˚वेला K.348.
    -वीर्यम् 1 power or might of Agni.
    -2 gold.
    -वेतालः Name of Vetāla (connected with the story of Vikra- māditya).
    -वेशः [अग्नेर्वेश इव] N. of an ancient medical authority (चरक).
    -वेश्मन् m. the fourteenth day of the karma-ṃāsa; Sūryaprajñapti.
    -वेश्यः 1 N. of a teacher, Mbh.
    -2 Name of the 22nd muhūrta; Sūryapraj- ñapti. धौम्य cf. Mb 14.64.8.
    -शरणम्, -शाला-लम् a fire-sanctuary; ˚मार्गमादेशय Ś.5; a house or place for keeping the sacred fire; ˚रक्षणाय स्थापितो$हम् V.3.
    -शर्मन् a. [अग्निरिव शृणाति तीव्रकोपत्वात् शॄ-मनिन्] very passionate. (-m.) N. of a sage.
    -शिख a. [अग्नेरिव अग्निरिव वा शिखा यस्य] fiery, fire-crested; दहतु ˚खैः सायकैः Rām.
    (-खः) 1 a lamp.
    -2 a rocket, fiery arrow.
    -3 an arrow in general.
    -4 safflower plant.
    -5 saffron.
    -6 जाङ्गलीवृक्ष.
    (-खम्) 1 saffron.
    -2 gold.
    (-खा) 1 a flame; शरैरग्निशिखोपमैः Mb.
    -2 N. of two plants लाङ्गली (Mar. वागचबका or कळलावी) Gloriosa Superba; of other plants (also Mar. कळलावी) Meni- spermum Cordifolium.
    -शुश्रूषा careful service or worship of fire.
    -शेखर a. fire-crested. (
    -रः) N. of the कुसुम्भ, कुङ्कुम and जाङ्गली trees (
    -रम्) gold,
    -शौच a. [अग्नेरिव शौचं यस्य] bright as fire; purified by fire K.252.
    -श्री a. [अग्नेरिव श्रीर्यस्य] glowing like fire; lighted by Agni
    -ष्टुत्, -ष्टुभ, -ष्टोम &c. see ˚ स्तुत्, ˚स्तुभ् &c.
    -ष्ठम् 1 kitchen; अग्निष्ठेष्वग्निशालासु Rām.6.1.16.
    -2 a fire-pan.
    -संयोगाः explosives. Kau. A.2.3.
    -ष्वात्तः see स्वात्तः
    -संस्कारः 1 consecration of fire.
    -2 hallowing or con- secrating by means of fire; burning on the funeral pile; यथार्हं ˚रं मालवाय दत्वा Dk.169; नास्य कार्यो$ग्निसंस्कारः Ms.5.69, पितरीवाग्निसंस्कारात्परा ववृतिरे क्रियाः । R.12.56.
    -सखः; -सहायः 1 the wind.
    -2 the wild pigeon (smoke- coloured).
    -3 smoke.
    -सम्भव a. [प. ब.] sprung or pro- duced from fire.
    (-वः) 1 wild safflower.
    -2 lymph, result of digestion. (
    -वम्) gold.
    -साक्षिक [अग्निः साक्षी यत्र, कप्] a. or adv. keeping fire for a witness, in the presence of fire; पञ्चबाण˚ M.4.12. ˚मर्यादो भर्ता हि शरणं स्त्रियाः H.1.v. l, R.11.48.
    -सारम् [अग्नौ सारं यस्य अत्यन्तानलोत्तापनेपि सारांशादहनात् Tv.] रसाञ्जन, a sort of medical preparation for the eyes. (
    -रः -रम्) power or essence of fire.
    -सुतः Kārttikeya; त्वामद्य निहनिष्यामि क्रौञ्चमग्निसुतो यथा । Mb.7.156.93.
    -सूत्रम् a thread of fire.
    -2 a girdle of sacrificial grass (मौञ्जीमेखला) put upon a young Brāhmaṇa at the time of investiture.
    -सूनुः (See -सुतः), (सेनानीरग्निभूर्गुहः । Amar.); देव्यङ्कसंविष्ट- मिवाग्निसूनुम् । Bu. ch.1.67.
    -स्तम्भः 1 stopping the burning power of Agni.
    -2 N. of a Mantra used in this operation.
    -3 N. of a medicine so used.
    -स्तुत् m. (अग्निष्टुत्) [अग्निः स्तूयते$त्र; स्तु-आधारे क्विप् षत्वम्] the first day of the Agniṣṭoma sacrifice; N. of a por- tion of that sacrifice which extends over one day; यजेत वाश्वमेधेन स्वर्जिता गोसवेन वा । अभिजिद्विश्वजिद्भ्यां वा त्रिवृता- ग्निष्टुतापि वा ॥ Ms.11.74.
    -स्तुभ् (˚ष्टुभ्) m. [अग्निः स्तुभ्यते$त्र; स्तुभ्-क्विप् षत्वम्]
    1 = अग्निष्टोम.
    -2 N. of a son of the sixth Manu.
    -रतोमः (˚ष्टोमः) [अग्नेः स्तोमः स्तुतिसाधनं यत्र]
    1 N. of a protracted ceremony or sacrificeial rite extending over several days in spring and forming an essential part of the ज्योतिष्टोम.
    -2 a Mantra or Kalpa with reference to this sacrifice; ˚मे भवो मन्त्रः ˚मः; ˚मस्य व्याख्यानम्, कल्पः ˚मः P.IV.3.66. Vārt.
    -3 N. of the son of the sixth Manu.
    -4 a species of the Soma plant; ˚सामन् a part of the Sāma Veda chanted at the conclu- sion of the Agniṣṭoma sacrifice.
    -सावर्णिः Name of Manu.
    -स्थ a. (ष्ठ) [अग्नौ स्थातुमर्हति; स्था-क षत्वम्] placed in, over, or near the fire. (ष्ठः) an iron frying-pan; in the अश्वमेध sacrifice the 11th Yūpa which of all the 21 is nearest the fire.
    -स्वात्तः (written both as ˚स्वात्त and ˚ष्वात्त) (pl.) [अग्नितः i. e. श्राद्धीयविप्रकर- रूपानलात् सुष्ठु आत्तं ग्रहणं येषां ते] N. of a class of Pitṛs or Manes who, when living on earth, maintained the sacred or domestic fires, but who did not perform the Agniṣṭoma and other sacrifices. They are regarded as Manes of Gods and Brāhmaṇas and also as descen- dants of Marīchi; Ms.3.195. अग्निष्वात्ताः पितर एह गच्छत Tsy.2.5.12.2. (मनुष्यजन्मन्यग्निष्टोमादियागमकृत्वा स्मार्तकर्मनिष्ठाः सन्तो मृत्वा च पितृत्वं गताः इति सायणः).
    -हुत्, -होतृ Ved. sacrificing to Agni, having Agni for a priest; Rv.1.66.8.
    -होत्रम् [अग्नये हूयते$त्र, हु-त्र, च. त.]
    1 an oblation to Agni (chiefly of milk, oil and sour gruel.).
    -2 maintenance of the sacred fire and offering oblation to it; (अग्नये होत्रं होमो$स्मिन् कर्मणीति अग्निहोत्रमिति कर्मनाम); or the sacred fire itself; तपोवनाग्निहोत्रधूमलेखासु K.26. होता स्यात् ˚त्रस्य Ms.11.36. ˚त्रमुपासते 42; स्त्रीं दाहयेत् ˚त्रेण Ms.5.167,6.4, दाहयित्वाग्निहोत्रेण स्त्रियं वृत्तवतीम् Y.1.89. The time of throwing oblations into the fire is, as ordained by the sun himself, evening (अग्नये सायं जुहुयात् सूर्याय प्रातर्जुहुयात्). Agnihotra is of two kinds; नित्य of constant obligation (यावज्जीवमग्निहोत्रं जुहोति) and काम्य occasional or optional (उपसद्भिश्चरित्वा मासमेकमग्निहोत्रं जुहोति). (
    -त्र) a. Ved.
    1 destined for, connected with, Agnihotra.
    -2 sacrificing to Agni. ˚न्यायः The rule according to which the नित्यकर्मन्s (which are to be performed यावज्जीवम्) are performed at their stipulated or scheduled time only, during one's life time. This is discussed and established by जैमिनि and शबर at Ms.6. 2.23-26. in connection with अग्निहोत्र and other कर्मन्s. ˚हवनी (णी) a ladle used in sacrificial libations, or अग्निहोत्रहविर्ग्रहणी ऋक् Tv.; See हविर्ग्रहणी; ˚हुत् offering the अग्निहोत्र; ˚आहुतिः invocation or oblation connected with अग्निहोत्र.
    -होत्रिन् a. [अग्निहोत्र-मत्वर्थे इनि]
    1 one who practises the Agnihotra, or consecrates and maintains the sacred fire.
    -2 one who has prepared the sacrifi- cial place.
    -होत्री Sacrificial cow; तामग्निहोत्रीमृषयो जगृहु- र्ब्रह्मवादिनः Bhāg.8.8.2.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > अग्निः _agniḥ

  • 10 कर्मन् _karman

    कर्मन् -m. Viśvakarmā; शक्रस्य नु सभा दिव्या भास्वरा कर्मनिर्मिता Mb.2.7.1. -n. [कृ-मनिन् Uṇ.4.144]
    1 Action, work, deed.
    -2 Execution, performance; प्रीतो$स्मि सो$हं यद् भुक्तं वनं तैः कृतकर्मभिः Rām.5.63.3.
    -3 Business, office, duty; संप्रति विषवैद्यानां कर्म M.4.
    -4 A religious rite (it may be either नित्य, नैमित्तिक or काम्य).
    -5 A specific action, moral duty.
    -6 (a) Performance of religious rites as opposed to speculative religion or knowledge of Brahman (opp. ज्ञान); अपरो दहृने स्वकर्मणां ववृते R.8.2. (b) Labour, work.
    -7 Product, result.
    -8 A natural or active property (as support of the earth).
    -9 Fate, the certain consequence of acts done in a former life; कर्मायत्तं फलं पुंसां बुद्धिः कर्मानुसारिणी Bh.2.89,94.
    -1 (In gram.) The object of of an action; कर्तुरीप्सिततमं कर्म P.I.4.49.
    -11 (In Vaiś. Phil.) Motion considered as one of the seven categories of things; (thus defined:-- एकद्रव्यमगुणं संयोगविभागेष्वनपेक्षकारणं कर्म Vaiś. Sūtra. (It is five-fold:-- उत्क्षेपणं ततो$वक्षेपणमाकुञ्चनं तथा । प्रसारणं च गमनं कर्माण्येतानि पञ्च च ॥ Bhāṣā P.6.)
    -12 Organ of sense. प्रजापतिर्ह कर्माणि ससृजे Bṛi. Up.1.5.21.
    -13 Organ of action; कर्माणि कर्मभिः कुर्वन् Bhāg.11.3.6.
    -14 (In Astr.) The tenth lunar mansion.
    -15 Practice, training; सर्वेषां कर्मणा वीर्यं जवस्तेजश्च वर्धते Kau. A.2.2.
    -Comp. -अक्षम a. incapable of doing anything.
    -अङ्गम् part of any act; part of a sacrificial rite (as प्रयाज of the Darśa sacrifice).
    -अधिकारः the right of performing religious rites.
    -अनुरूप a.
    1 according to action or any par- ticular office.
    -2 according to actions done in a pre- vious existence.
    -अनुष्ठानम् practising one's duties.
    -अनुसारः consequence of, or conformity to, acts.
    -अन्तः 1 the end of any business or task.
    -2 a work, busi- ness, execution of business.
    -3 a barn, a store of grain &c. Ms.7.62 (कर्मान्तः इक्षुधान्यादिसंग्रहस्थानम् Kull.)
    -4 cultivated ground.
    -5 a worker; कच्चिन्न सर्वे कर्मान्ताः Rām.2.1.52.
    -अन्तरम् 1 difference or contrariety of action.
    -2 penance, expiation.
    -3 suspension of a religious action.
    -4 another work or action; कर्मान्तर- नियुक्तासु निर्ममन्थ स्वयं दधि Bhāg.1.9.1.
    -अन्तिक a. final. (
    -कः) a servant, workman, Rām.1.13.7.
    -अपनुत्तिः f. removing, sending away of कर्म; जन्मकर्माप- नुत्तये Bhāg.12.2.17.
    -अर्ह a. fit or suitable to an act or the rite. (
    -र्हः) a man.
    -आख्या f. Name received from the act performed; तस्मात् छिन्नगमनो$श्वो$पि छाग इति कर्माख्या भविष्यति । ŚB. on MS.6.8.37.
    -आजीवः one who maintains himself by some profession (as that of an artisan &c.)
    -आत्मन् a. endowed with the princi- ples of action, active; कर्मात्मनां च देवानां सो$सृजत्प्राणिनां प्रभुः Ms.1.22. (-m.) the soul.
    -आयतनम् see कर्मेन्द्रियम्; शव्दः स्पर्शो रसो गन्धो रूपं चेत्यर्थजातयः । गत्युक्त्युत्सर्गशिल्पानि कर्मायतनसिद्धयः Bhāg.11.22.16.
    -आशयः receptacle or accumulation of (good and evil) acts; निर्हृत्य कर्माशयमाशु याति परां गतिम् Bhāg.1.46.32.
    -इन्द्रियम् an organ of action, as distinguished from ज्ञानेन्द्रिय; (they are:- वाक्पाणिपादपायूपस्थानि; Ms.2.99; see under इन्द्रिय also) कर्मेन्द्रियाणि संयम्य Bg.3.6,7.
    -उदारम् any valiant or noble act, magnanimity, prowess.
    -उद्युक्त a. busy, engaged, active, zealous.
    -करः 1 a hired labourer (a servant who is not a slave); आ तस्य गोः प्रतिदानात् कर्मकारी आगबीनः कर्मकरः Mbh. on P.V.2.14. कर्मकराः स्थपत्यादयः Pt.1; Śi.14.16.
    -2 Yama.
    -कर्तृ m. (in gram.) an agent who is at the same time the object of the action; e. g. पच्यते ओदनः, it is thus defined:- क्रियमाणं तु यत्कर्म स्वयमेव प्रसिध्यति । सुकरैः स्वैर्गुणैः कर्तुः कर्मकर्तेति तद्विदुः ॥ न चान्तरेण कर्मकर्तारं सकर्मका अकर्मका भवन्ति Mbh. on P.I.3.27
    -काण्डः, -ण्डम् that department of the Veda which relates to ceremonial acts and sacrificial rites and the merit arising from a due performance thereof.
    -कारः 1 one who does any business, a mechanic, artisan (technically a worker not hired).
    -2 any labourer in general (whether hired or not).
    -3 a black-smith; हरिणाक्षि कटाक्षेण आत्मानमवलोकय । न हि खङ्गो विजानाति कर्मकारं स्वकारणम् ॥ Udb.
    -4 a bull.
    -कारिन् m. a labourer, artisan, workman.
    -कार्मुकः, -कम् a strong bow.
    -कीलकः a washerman.
    -कृत्यम् activity, the state of active exertion; यः प्रथमः कर्मकृत्याय जज्ञे Av.4.24.6.
    -क्षम a. able to perform any work or duty; आत्मकर्मक्षमं देहं क्षात्रो धर्म इवाश्रितः R.1.13.
    -क्षेत्रम् the land of religious acts, i. e. भरतवर्ष; Bhāg.5.17.11. cf. कर्मभूमि.
    -गतिः f. the course of fate; अथ कर्मगतिं चित्रां दृष्ट्वा$स्य हसितं मया Ks.59.159.
    -गृहीत a. caught in the very act (as a thief.).
    -ग्रन्थिः f. a term in Jaina metaphysics connoting 'weakness in the form of वासनाs produced by अज्ञान'.
    -घातः leaving off or suspending work.
    -च(चा)ण्डालः 1 'base in deed', a man of very low acts or deeds; Vasiṣṭha mentions these kinds:-- असूयकः पिशुनश्च कृतघ्नो दीर्घरोषकः । चत्वारः कर्मचाण्डाला जन्मतश्चापि पञ्चमः ॥
    -2 one who com- mits an atrocious deed; अपूर्वकर्मचण्डालमयि मुग्धे विमुच्च माम् U.1.46.
    -3 N. of Rāhu.
    -चेष्टा active exertion, action. कर्मचेष्टास्वहः Ms.1.66.
    -चोदना 1 The motive impelling one to ritual acts. ज्ञानं ज्ञेयं परिज्ञाता त्रिविधा कर्मचोदना Bg.18.18.
    -2 any positive rule enjoining a religious act.
    -च्छेदः The loss caused by absence on duty; Kau. A.2.7.
    -जः a. resulting from an act; सिद्धिर्भवति कर्मजा Bg.4.12. कर्मजा गतयो नॄणामुत्तमाधममध्यमाः Ms.12.3.
    (-जः) 1 the holy fig-tree.
    -2 the Kali age.
    -3 the banian tree.
    -4 the effect arising from human acts:-- संयोग, विभाग &c.
    -5 heaven.
    -6 hell.
    -ज्ञ a. one acquaint- ed with religious rites.
    -त्यागः renunciation of worldly duties or ceremonial acts.
    -दुष्ट a. corrupt in action, wick- ed, immoral, disrespectable.
    -देवः a god through religious action; ये शतं गन्धर्वलोक आनन्दाः स एकः कर्मदेवानामानन्दः Bṛi. Up.4.3.33.
    -दोषः 1 sin, vice; अवेक्षेत गतीर्नॄणां कर्मदोष- समुद्भवाः Ms.6.61,95.
    -2 an error, defect, or blunder (in doing an act); कर्मदोषैर्न लिप्यते Ms.1,14.
    -3 evil consequence of human acts.
    -4 discreditable conduct.
    -धारयः N. of a compound, a subdivision of Tatpu- ruṣa, (in which the members of the compound are in apposition) तत्पुरुषः समानाधिकरणः कर्मधारयः P.I. 2.42. तत्पुरुष कर्म धारय येनाहं स्यां बहुव्रीहिः Udb.
    -ध्वंसः 1 loss of fruit arising from religious acts.
    -2 dis- appointment.
    -नामन् (in gram.) a participal noun.
    -नामधेयम् N. of an act or sacrifice. These names are not arbitrary or technical such as गुण and वृद्धि but are always significant; सर्वेष्वेव कर्मनामधेयेषु अर्थसमन्वयेनानुवाद- भूतो नामशद्बो वर्तते, न लौकिकार्थतिरस्कारेण परिभाषामात्रेण वृद्धिगुणवत् ŚB. on MS.1.6.41.
    -नाशा N. of a river between Kaśi and Bihar.
    -निश्चयः a decision of action; न लेमे कर्मनिश्चयम् Bm.1.648.
    -निषद्या a manufactory; Kau. A.2.4.
    -निष्ठ a. devoted to the performance of religious acts; अग्निर्वीरं श्रुत्यं कर्मनिष्ठाम् Rv.1.8.1; Ms.3.134.
    -न्यासः renunciation of the result of religious acts.
    -पथः 1 the direction or source of an action.
    -2 the path of religious rites (opp. ज्ञानमार्ग).
    -पाकः ripening of actions, reward of actions done in a former life; Pt.1.372.
    -प्रवचनीयः a term for certain prepositions, particles, or ad- verbs when they are not connected with verbs and govern a noun in some case; literally-the term means, 'Concerned with the setting forth of an action'. According to Indian grammarians it means 'that which spoke of an action (क्रियां प्रोक्तवन्तः)' e. g. आ in आ मुक्तेः संसारः is a कर्मप्रवचनीय; so अनु in जपमनु प्रावर्षत् &c; कर्म प्रोक्तवन्तः कर्मप्रवचनीया इति Mbh. on P.I.4.83. cf. उपसर्ग, गति and निपात also.
    -फलम् 1 fruit or reward of actions done in a former life; (pain, pleasure); न मे कर्मफले स्पृहा Bg.4.14;5.12;6.1; ˚फलत्याग Bg.12.11,18.2; ˚फलत्यागिन् Bg.18.11; ˚फलप्रेप्सुः Bg.18.27; ˚फलसंयोग Bg.5.14; ˚फलहेतु Bg.2.47. एवं संचिन्त्य मनसा प्रेत्य कर्मफलोदयम् Ms.11.231.
    -2 the fruit of Averrhoa Carambola (Mar. कर्मर); also कर्मरङ्ग.
    -बन्धः, -बन्धनम् confinement to repeated birth, as the consequence of religious acts, good or bad (by which the soul is attached to worldly plea- sures &c.); बुद्ध्या युक्तो यथा पार्थ कर्मबन्धं प्रहास्यति Bg.2.39.
    -भूः, -भूमिः f.
    1 the land of religious rites, i. e. भरतवर्ष, this world (a place for man's probation); प्राप्येमां कर्मभूमिम् Bh.2.1; K.174,319.
    -2 ploughed ground.
    -मासः the Calendar month of thirty days.
    -मीमांसा the Mīmāṁsā of ceremonial acts; see मीमांसा.
    -मूलम् a kind of sacred grass called कुश.
    -युगम् the fourth (the present) age of the world, i. e. the Kaliyuga.
    -योगः 1 performance of actions, worldly and religious rites; कर्मयोगेन योगिनाम् Bg.3.3;3.7;5.2;13.24.
    -2 active exertion, industry; Ms.1.115.
    -वचनम् (with Buddhists) the ritual.
    -वज्रः an epithet of a Śūdra.
    -वशः fate considered as the inevitable result of actions done in a former life.
    -वाटी a lunar day (तिथि).
    -विपाक = कर्मपाक.
    -शाला a work-shop.
    -शील, -शूर a. assiduous, active, laborious; cf. कर्म- शीलस्तु कर्मठे । Nm.
    -शौचम् humility.
    -श्रुतिः f. The word expressive of the act; कर्मश्रुतेः परार्थत्वात् MS.11. 2.6. (read या अत्र कर्मश्रुतिः दर्शपूर्णमासाभ्यामिति सा परार्था तृतीया-योगात् &c. शबर).
    -सङ्गः attachment to worldly duties and their results. तन्निबध्नाति... कर्मसङ्गेन Bg.14.7.
    -सचिवः a minister.
    -संन्यासिकः, -संन्यासिन् m.
    1 a religious person who has withdrawn from every kind of worldly act.
    -2 an ascetic who performs religious deeds without looking to their reward.
    -साक्षिन् m.
    1 an eyewitness; वह्निर्विवाहं प्रति कर्मसाक्षी Ku.7.83.
    -2 one who witnesses the good or bad actions of man; आदित्य भो लोककृताकृतज्ञ लोकस्य सत्यानृप- कर्मसाक्षिन् Rām.3.63.16. (There are nine divinities which are said to witness and watch over all human actions; सूर्यः सोमो यमः कालो महाभूतानि पञ्च च । एते शुभाशुभ- स्येह कर्मणो नव साक्षिणः ॥)
    -सिद्धिः f. accomplishment of any business or desired object; success. स्वकर्मसिद्धिं पुनरा- शशंसे Ku.
    -स्थानम् a public office, a place of business.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > कर्मन् _karman

  • 11 entendre

    entendre [ɑ̃tɑ̃dʀ]
    ➭ TABLE 41
    1. transitive verb
       a. [+ voix, bruit] to hear
    qu'est-ce que j'entends ? am I hearing right?
    tu vas être sage, tu entends ! (menace) you're to be good, do you hear!
       b. (par ouï-dire) entendre parler de qn/qch to hear of sb/sth
    entendre dire que... to hear it said that...
       c. ( = écouter) to listen to
    à l'entendre, c'est lui qui a tout fait to hear him talk you'd think he had done everything
    si ça continue, il va m'entendre ! (menace) if he doesn't stop I'll give him a piece of my mind!
       d. (formal = comprendre) to understand
    oui, j'entends bien, mais... yes, I quite understand but...
    laisser entendre à qn que... to give sb to understand that...
       e. (formal avec infinitif) ( = vouloir) to intend
       f. ( = vouloir dire) to mean
    qu'entendez-vous par là ? what do you mean by that?
    2. reflexive verb
       a. ( = être en bons termes) to get on
       b. ( = être d'accord) to agree
    hier tu m'as dit le contraire, il faudrait s'entendre ! yesterday you told me exactly the opposite, make up your mind!
       e. ( = se comprendre) quand je dis magnifique, je m'entends, disons que c'est très joli when I say it's magnificent, what I really mean is that it's very attractive
    entendons-nous bien ! let's be quite clear about this
    * * *
    ɑ̃tɑ̃dʀ
    1.
    1) ( percevoir par l'ouïe) to hear [bruit, mot]

    entendre quelqu'un pleurer, entendre quelqu'un qui pleure — to hear somebody crying

    vous entendrez parler de moi! — ( menace) you haven't heard the last of it!

    2) ( prêter attention à) [juge, police] to hear [témoin, témoignage]; [dieu] to hear [prières, croyant]

    à t'entendre, tout va bien — according to you, everything is fine

    3) fml ( comprendre) to understand

    elle m'a laissé or donné à or fait entendre que — she gave me to understand that

    ils ne l'entendent pas de la sorte or de cette oreille — they don't see it that way

    4) ( signifier) to mean

    2.
    s'entendre verbe pronominal
    1) ( sympathiser) to get on ou along ( avec with)
    2) ( se mettre d'accord) to agree ( sur on)
    3) ( être perçu par l'oreille) [bruit] to be heard; ( soi-même) to hear oneself; ( les uns les autres) to hear each other

    pour te faire culpabiliser, elle s'y entend! — (colloq) when it comes to making you feel guilty, she's an expert!

    * * *
    ɑ̃tɑ̃dʀ vt
    1) [son, bruit, conversation] to hear

    Je vous entends très mal. — I can hardly hear you.

    J'ai mal entendu. — I didn't hear., I didn't hear properly.

    Je ne t'entends pas. — I can't hear you.

    On entend parler à côté. — You can hear people talking next door.

    J'ai entendu dire qu'il est dangereux de nager ici. — I've heard that it's dangerous to swim here.

    J'ai entendu dire qu'il est très malade. — I've heard that he is very ill.

    Je suis heureux de vous l'entendre dire. — I'm pleased to hear you say it.

    entendre raison — to see sense, to listen to reason

    2) (= comprendre) to understand

    ne rien entendre à... — not to know anything about...

    Il n'entend rien à l'informatique. — He doesn't know anything about computers.

    laisser entendre que; faire entendre que — to imply that

    Ne recommence pas, tu entends! — Don't do it again, do you hear?

    4) (= vouloir dire) to mean

    J'entends qu'il faut savoir se débrouiller. — What I mean is you have to be able to stand on your own two feet.

    5) (= vouloir)

    entendre faire — to intend to do, to mean to do

    J'entends bien récupérer cet argent. — I fully intend to get the money back.

    * * *
    entendre verb table: rendre
    A vtr
    1 ( percevoir par l'ouïe) to hear [bruit, mot]; entendre qn pleurer, entendre qn qui pleure to hear sb crying; il pleure-oui, je l'entends he is crying-yes, I can hear him; tu n'entends pas? c'est pourtant net can't you hear it? it's quite clear; réussir à se faire entendre to manage to make oneself heard; tu as entendu? did you hear that?; j'ai mal entendu I didn't hear properly; si j'ai bien entendu if I heard correctly; une expression qu'on entend à la campagne an expression you hear in the country; entendre qch de ses propres oreilles to hear sth with one's own ears; qu'est-ce que j'entends? tu nous quittes? what's this I hear? you're leaving (us)?; elle entend mal she's hard of hearing; faire entendre un cri/gémissement to give a cry/groan; une explosion se fit entendre there was the sound of an explosion; j'ai entendu dire que I've heard (say) that; je n'en ai jamais entendu parler I've never heard of it; je ne veux plus en entendre parler I don't want to hear another word about it; vous entendrez parler de moi! ( menace) you haven't heard the last of it!; on n'entend plus parler de ce projet nothing more has been heard about the project; on n'entend plus parler de lui his name is never mentioned any more; ⇒ mouche;
    2 ( prêter attention à) [juge, police] to hear [témoin, témoignage]; [dieu] to hear [prières, croyant]; entendre la messe to attend mass; à t'entendre, tout va bien according to you, everything is fine; raconter qch à qui veut l'entendre to tell sth to anyone who'll listen; qu'est- ce qu'il ne faut pas entendre! I've never heard such nonsense!; elle ne veut rien entendre she won't listen; (que) le ciel vous entende! let's hope that's how it turns out!;
    3 fml ( comprendre) to understand [concept, expression]; je n'y entends pas grand-chose I don't understand much about it; ‘c'est confidentiel’-‘j'entends bien’ ‘it's confidential’-‘I quite understand’; il agit comme il l'entend he does as he likes; fais comme tu l'entends do as you think best; ne pas arriver à se faire entendre not to be able to make oneself understood; ne pas arriver à se faire entendre de qn not to be able to get through to sb; elle m'a laissé or donné à or fait entendre que she gave me to understand that; elle a laissé entendre que she intimated that; ils ne l'entendent pas de la sorte or de cette oreille they don't see it that way;
    4 ( signifier) to mean; qu'entends-tu par là? what do you mean by that? ; ce n'est pas douloureux, j'entends, pas plus qu'une piqûre it isn't painful, I mean, no more than an injection; le marxisme entendu comme une philosophie marxism as a philosophy;
    5 fml ( avoir l'intention de) entendre faire to intend doing, to have the intention of doing; j'entends bien rester ici I have every intention of staying here; j'entends qu'on fasse ce que je dis I expect people to do what I say.
    B s'entendre vpr
    1 ( sympathiser) to get on ou along (avec with); ils s'entendent très bien they get on ou along really well; ils ne s'entendent pas they don't get on ou along; ⇒ chat, larron;
    2 ( se mettre d'accord) to agree (sur on); s'entendre sur une heure to agree on a time; on leur dit la vérité ou pas? il faudrait s'entendre shall we tell them the truth or not? let's get it straight; entendons-nous bien, personne ne doit leur dire la vérité it goes without saying, nobody must tell them the truth;
    3 ( être perçu par l'oreille) [bruit] to be heard; ( soi-même) to hear oneself; ( les uns les autres) to hear each other; cela s'entendait à l'autre bout de la ville you could hear it on the other side of town;
    4 ( être compris) phrase qui peut s'entendre de plusieurs façons sentence which can be taken in several different ways; après paiement, s'entend! after payment, of course!; cela or il s'entend fml ( c'est évident) of course; ce n'est pas tout à fait ça mais je m'entends it's not exactly that, but I know what I mean;
    5 ( être compétent) s'y entendre en meubles anciens to know about antiques; s'entendre or s'y entendre à peindre des portraits to be good at portraits; pour te faire culpabiliser, elle s'y entend! hum when it comes to making you feel guilty, she's an expert (at it) ou she's got it down to a fine art.
    [ɑ̃tɑ̃dr] verbe transitif
    1. [percevoir par l'ouïe] to hear
    parlez plus fort, on n'entend rien speak up, we can't hear a word (you're saying)
    silence, je ne veux pas vous entendre! quiet, I don't want to hear a sound from you!
    on n'entend parler que de lui/de sa pièce he's/his play's the talk of the town
    on entendrait/on aurait entendu voler une mouche you could hear/could have heard a pin drop
    j'en ai entendu de belles ou de bonnes ou des vertes et des pas mûres sur son compte (familier) I've heard a thing or two about him
    ce qu'il faut entendre!, ce qu'il faut pas entendre! (familier) the things some people come out with!, the things you hear!
    2. [écouter] to hear, to listen to
    à l'entendre, à les entendre: à les entendre tout serait de ma faute to hear them talk ou according to them it's all my fault
    faire entendre raison à quelqu'un to make somebody listen to reason, to bring somebody to his/her senses
    3. [accepter - demande] to agree to (inseparable) ; [ - vœu] to grant
    entendre la messe to attend ou to hear mass
    entendre une confession to hear ou to take a confession
    5. DROIT [témoin] to hear, to interview
    6. (soutenu) [comprendre] to understand
    il doit être bien entendu que... it must be properly understood that...
    donner quelque chose à entendre ou laisser entendre quelque chose à quelqu'un: elle m'a laissé ou donné à entendre que... she gave me to understand that...
    7. [apprendre] to hear
    8. [vouloir dire] to mean
    9. [vouloir] to want, to intend
    j'entends qu'on m'obéisse I intend to ou I mean to ou I will be obeyed
    ————————
    s'entendre verbe pronominal (emploi passif)
    1. [être perçu] to be heard
    cela s'entend de loin you can hear it ou it can be heard from far off
    [être utilisé - mot, expression] to be heard
    2. [être compris] to be understood
    (cela) s'entend [c'est évident] obviously, it's obvious, that much is clear
    après l'hiver, (cela) s'entend when the winter is over, of course ou it goes without saying
    ————————
    s'entendre verbe pronominal (emploi réciproque)
    1. [pouvoir s'écouter] to hear each other ou one another
    2. [s'accorder] to agree
    3. [sympathiser] to get on
    ————————
    s'entendre verbe pronominal (emploi réfléchi)
    1. [percevoir sa voix] to hear oneself
    on ne s'entend plus tellement il y a de bruit there's so much noise, you can't hear yourself think
    tu ne t'entends pas! you should hear yourself (talking)!, if (only) you could hear yourself!
    quand je dis qu'il est grand, je m'entends, il est plus grand que moi when I say he's tall I really mean he's taller than myself
    ————————
    s'entendre verbe pronominal intransitif
    s'y entendre [s'y connaître]: il s'y entend en mécanique he's good at ou he knows (a lot) about mechanics
    ————————
    s'entendre avec verbe pronominal plus préposition
    1. [s'accorder avec] to reach an agreement with
    parvenir à s'entendre avec quelqu'un sur quelque chose to come to an understanding ou to reach an agreement with somebody about something
    2. [sympathiser avec] to get on with

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > entendre

  • 12 πνεῦμα

    πνεῦμα, ατος, τό (πνέω; Aeschyl., Pre-Socr., Hdt.+. On the history of the word s. Rtzst., Mysterienrel.3 308ff).
    air in movement, blowing, breathing (even the glowing exhalations of a volcanic crater: Diod S 5, 7, 3)
    wind (Aeschyl. et al.; LXX, EpArist, Philo; Jos., Ant. 2, 343; 349; SibOr 8, 297) in wordplay τὸ πνεῦμα πνεῖ the wind blows J 3:8a (EpJer 60 πνεῦμα ἐν πάσῃ χώρᾳ πνεῖ. But s. TDonn, ET 66, ’54f, 32; JThomas, Restoration Qtrly 24, ’81, 219–24). ὀθόνη πλοίου ὑπὸ πνεύματος πληρουμένη MPol 15:2. Of God ὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ πνεύματα who makes his angels winds Hb 1:7; 1 Cl 36:3 (both Ps 103:4).
    the breathing out of air, blowing, breath (Aeschyl. et al.; Pla., Tim. 79b; LXX) ὁ ἄνομος, ὅν ὁ κύριος Ἰησοῦς ἀνελεῖ τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 2 Th 2:8 (cp. Is 11:4; Ps 32:6).
    that which animates or gives life to the body, breath, (life-)spirit (Aeschyl. et al.; Phoenix of Colophon 1, 16 [Coll. Alex. p. 231] πν.=a breathing entity [in contrast to becoming earth in death]; Polyb. 31, 10, 4; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 4 p. 394b, 8ff; PHib 5, 54 [III B.C.]; PGM 4, 538; 658; 2499; LXX; TestAbr A 17 p. 98, 19 [Stone p. 44] al.; JosAs 19:3; SibOr 4, 46; Tat. 4:2) ἀφιέναι τὸ πνεῦμα give up one’s spirit, breathe one’s last (Eur., Hec. 571; Porphyr., Vi. Plotini 2) Mt 27:50. J says for this παραδιδόναι τὸ πν. 19:3 (cp. ApcMos 31 ἀποδῶ τὸ πν.; Just., D. 105, 5). Of the return of the (life-)spirit of a deceased person into her dead body ἐπέστρεψεν τὸ πν. αὐτῆς Lk 8:55 (cp. Jdg 15:19). εἰς χεῖράς σου παρατίθεμαι τὸ πν. μου into your hands I entrust my spirit 23:46 (Ps 30:6; for alleged focus on ἐλπίζειν s. EBons, BZ 38, ’94, 93–101). κύριε Ἰησοῦ, δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου Ac 7:59; composite of both passages AcPl Ha 10, 23 (cp. ApcMos 42). τὸ πν. μου ὁ δεσπότης δέξεται GJs 23:3 (on the pneuma flying upward after death cp. Epicharm. in Vorsokrat. 23 [=13, 4th ed.], B 9 and 22; Eur., Suppl. 533 πνεῦμα μὲν πρὸς αἰθέρα, τὸ σῶμα δʼ ἐς γῆν; PGM 1, 177ff τελευτήσαντός σου τὸ σῶμα περιστελεῖ, σοῦ δὲ τὸ πνεῦμα … εἰς ἀέρα ἄξει σὺν αὑτῷ ‘when you are dead [the angel] will wrap your body … and take your spirit with him into the sky’). τὸ σῶμα χωρὶς πν. νεκρόν ἐστιν Js 2:26. πν. ζωῆς ἐκ τ. θεοῦ εἰσῆλθεν ἐν αὐτοῖς (i.e. the prophet-witnesses who have been martyred) Rv 11:11 (cp. Ezk 37:10 v.l. εἰσῆλθεν εἰς αὐτοὺς πνεῦμα ζωῆς; vs. 5). Of the spirit that animated the image of a beast, and enabled it to speak and to have Christians put to death 13:15.—After a person’s death, the πν. lives on as an independent being, in heaven πνεύματα δικαὶων τετελειωμένων Hb 12:23 (cp. Da 3:86 εὐλογεῖτε, πνεύματα καὶ ψυχαὶ δικαίων, τὸν κύριον). According to non-biblical sources, the πν. are in the netherworld (cp. En 22:3–13; Sib Or 7, 127) or in the air (PGM 1, 178), where evil spirits can prevent them from ascending higher (s. ἀήρ2b). τοῖς ἐν φυλακῇ πνεύμασιν πορευθεὶς ἐκήρυξεν 1 Pt 3:19 belongs here if it refers to Jesus’ preaching to the spirits of the dead confined in Hades (so Usteri et al.; s. also JMcCulloch, The Harrowing of Hell, 1930), whether it be when he descended into Hades, or when he returned to heaven (so RBultmann, Bekenntnis u. Liedfragmente im 1 Pt: ConNeot11, ’47, 1–14).—CClemen, Niedergefahren zu den Toten 1900; JTurmel, La Descente du Christ aux enfers 1905; JMonnier, La Descente aux enfers 1906; HHoltzmann, ARW 11, 1908, 285–97; KGschwind, Die Niederfahrt Christi in die Unterwelt 1911; DPlooij, De Descensus in 1 Pt 3:19 en 4:6: TT 47, 1913, 145–62; JBernard, The Descent into Hades a Christian Baptism (on 1 Pt 3:19ff): Exp. 8th ser., 11, 1916, 241–74; CSchmidt, Gespräche Jesu mit seinen Jüngern: TU 43, 1919, 452ff; JFrings, BZ 17, 1926, 75–88; JKroll, Gott u. Hölle ’32; RGanschinietz, Katabasis: Pauly-W. X/2, 1919, 2359–449; Clemen2 89–96; WBieder, Die Vorstellung v. d. Höllenfahrt Jesu Chr. ’49; SJohnson, JBL 79, ’60, 48–51; WDalton, Christ’s Proclamation to the Spirits ’65. S. also the lit. in Windisch, Hdb.2 1930, exc. on 1 Pt 3:20; ESelwyn, The First Ep. of St. Peter ’46 and 4c below.—This is prob. also the place for θανατωθεὶς μὲν σαρκὶ ζωοποιηθεὶς δὲ πνεύματι• ἐν ᾧ καὶ … 1 Pt 3:18f (some mss. read πνεύματι instead of πνεύμασιν in vs. 19, evidently in ref. to the manner of Jesus’ movement; πνεῦμα is that part of Christ which, in contrast to σάρξ, did not pass away in death, but survived as an individual entity after death; s. ἐν 7). Likew. the contrast κατὰ σάρκα … κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 1:3f. Cp. 1 Ti 3:16.
    a part of human personality, spirit
    when used with σάρξ, the flesh, it denotes the immaterial part 2 Cor 7:1; Col 2:5. Flesh and spirit=the whole personality, in its outer and inner aspects, oft. in Ign.: IMg 1:2; 13:1a; ITr ins; 12:1; IRo ins; ISm 1:1; IPol 5:1; AcPl Ant 13, 18 (=Aa I 237, 3).—In the same sense beside σῶμα, the body (Simplicius, In Epict. p. 50, 1; Ps.-Phoc. 106f; PGM 1, 178) 1 Cor 5:3–5; 7:34.—The inner life of humans is divided into ψυχὴ καὶ πνεῦμα (cp. Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 10 p. 370c τὶ θεῖον ὄντως ἐνῆν πνεῦμα τῇ ψυχῇ=a divine spirit was actually in the soul; Wsd 15:11; Jos., Ant. 1, 34; Tat. 13, 2; 15, 1 et al.; Ath. 27, 1. S. also Herm. Wr. 10, 13; 16f; PGM 4, 627; 630. ἐκ τριῶν συνεστάναι λέγουσι τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐκ ψυχῆς καὶ σώματος καὶ πνεύματος Did., Gen. 55, 14) Hb 4:12. Cp. Phil 1:27. τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ καὶ τὸ σῶμα 1 Th 5:23 (s. GMilligan, Thess. 1908, 78f; EvDobschütz in Meyer X7 1909, 230ff; EBurton, Spirit, Soul, and Flesh 1918; AFestugière, La Trichotomie des 1 Th 5:23 et la Philos. gr.: RSR 20, 1930, 385–415; CMasson, RTP 33, ’45, 97–102; FGrant, An Introd. to NT Thought ’50, 161–66). σαρκί, ψυχῇ, πνεύματι IPhld 11:2.
    as the source and seat of insight, feeling, and will, gener. as the representative part of human inner life (cp. PGM 4, 627; 3 Km 20:5; Sir 9:9 al.; Just., D. 30, 1; Did., Gen. 232, 5) ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ Mk 2:8. ἀναστενάξας τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ λέγει 8:12 (s. ἀναστενάζω). ἠγαλλίασεν τὸ πν. μου Lk 1:47 (in parallelism w. ψυχή vs. 46, as Sir 9:9). ἠγαλλιάσατο τῷ πν. 10:21 v.l., Ἰησοῦς ἐνεβριμήσατο τῷ πν. J 11:33 (s. ἐμβριμάομαι 3); Ἰης. ἐταράχθη τῷ πν. 13:21. παρωξύνετο τὸ πν. αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ Ac 17:16; ζέων τῷ πν. with spirit-fervor 18:25 (s. ζέω). τὸ παιδίον ἐκραταιοῦτο πνεύματι Lk 1:80; 2:40 v.l.; ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ πν. Paul made up his mind Ac 19:21 (some would put this pass. in 6c, but cp. Lk 1:66 and analogous formulations Hom. et al. in L-S-J-M s.v. τίθημι A6). προσκυνήσουσιν τῷ πατρὶ ἐν πνεύματι of the spiritual, i.e. the pure, inner worship of God, that has nothing to do w. holy times, places, appurtenances, or ceremonies J 4:23; cp. vs. 24b. πν. συντετριμμένον (Ps 50:19) 1 Cl 18:17; 52:4.—2 Cl 20:4; Hv 3, 12, 2; 3, 13, 2.—This usage is also found in Paul. His conviction (s. 5 below) that the Christian possesses the (divine) πνεῦμα and thus is different fr. all other people, leads him to choose this word in preference to others, in order to characterize a believer’s inner being gener. ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πν. μου Ro 1:9. οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πν. μου 2 Cor 2:13. Cp. 7:13. As a matter of fact, it can mean simply a person’s very self or ego: τὸ πνεῦμα συμμαρτυρεῖ τῷ πνεύματι ἡμῶν the Spirit (of God) bears witness to our very self Ro 8:16 (cp. PGM 12, 327 ἠκούσθη μου τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπὸ πνεύματος οὐρανοῦ). ἀνέπαυσαν τὸ ἐμὸν πν. καὶ τὸ ὑμῶν they have refreshed both me and you 1 Cor 16:18. ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χρ. μετά τοῦ πν. (ὑμῶν) Gal 6:18; Phil 4:23; Phlm 25. Cp. 2 Ti 4:22. Likew. in Ign. τὸ ἐμὸν πν. my (unworthy) self IEph 18:1; IRo 9:3; cp. 1 Cor 2:11a—On the relation of the divine Spirit to the believer’s spiritual self, s. SWollenweider, Der Geist Gottes als Selbst der Glaubenden: ZTK 93, ’96, 163–92.—Only a part of the inner life, i.e. that which concerns the will, is meant in τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής Mt 26:41; Mk 14:38; Pol 7:2. That which is inferior, anxiety, fear of suffering, etc. is attributed to the σάρξ.—The mng. of the expr. οἱ πτωχοὶ τῷ πνεύματι Mt 5:3 is difficult to determine w. certainty (cp. Pla., Ep. 7, 335a πένης ἀνὴρ τὴν ψυχήν. The dat. as τῇ ψυχῇ M. Ant. 6, 52; 8, 51). The sense is prob. those who are poor in their inner life, because they do not have a misdirected pride in their own spiritual riches (s. AKlöpper, Über den Sinn u. die ursprgl. Form der ersten Seligpreisung der Bergpredigt bei Mt: ZWT 37, 1894, 175–91; RKabisch, Die erste Seligpreisung: StKr 69, 1896, 195–215; KKöhler, Die ursprgl. Form der Seligpreisungen: StKr 91, 1918, 157–92; JBoehmer, De Schatkamer 17, 1923, 11–16, TT [Copenhagen] 4, 1924, 195–207, JBL 45, 1926, 298–304; WMacgregor, ET 39, 1928, 293–97; VMacchioro, JR 12, ’32, 40–49; EEvans, Theology 47, ’44, 55–60; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 134ff; Betz, SM 116 n. 178 for Qumran reff.).
    spiritual state, state of mind, disposition ἐν ἀγάπῃ πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος with love and a gentle spirit 1 Cor 4:21; cp. Gal 6:1. τὸ πν. τοῦ νοὸς ὑμῶν Eph 4:23 (s. νοῦς 2a). ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ τοῦ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος with the imperishable (gift) of a quiet disposition 1 Pt 3:4.
    an independent noncorporeal being, in contrast to a being that can be perceived by the physical senses, spirit (ELangton, Good and Evil Spirits ’42).
    God personally: πνεῦμα ὁ θεός J 4:24a (Ath. 16, 2; on God as a spirit, esp. in the Stoa, s. MPohlenz, D. Stoa ’48/49. Hdb. ad loc. Also Celsus 6, 71 [Stoic]; Herm. Wr. 18, 3 ἀκάματον μέν ἐστι πνεῦμα ὁ θεός).
    good, or at least not expressly evil spirits or spirit-beings (cp. CIG III, 5858b δαίμονες καὶ πνεύματα; Proclus on Pla., Cratyl. p. 69, 6; 12 Pasqu.; En 15:4; 6; 8; 10; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 15f [Stone p. 10, 15f] πάντα τὰ ἐπουράνια πνεύματα; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 26 [Stone p. 82] ὑψηλὸν πν.; PGM 3, 8 ἐπικαλοῦμαί σε, ἱερὸν πνεῦμα; 4, 1448; 3080; 12, 249) πνεῦμα w. ἄγγελος (cp. Jos., Ant. 4, 108; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 3, 33; 8, 12) Ac 23:8f. God is ὁ παντὸς πνεύματος κτίστης καὶ ἐπίσκοπος 1 Cl 59:3b.—Pl., God the μόνος εὐεργέτης πνεύματων 1 Cl 59:3a. Cp. 64 (s. on this Num 16:22; 27:16. Prayers for vengeance fr. Rheneia [Dssm., LO 351–55=LAE 423ff=SIG 1181, 2] τὸν θεὸν τὸν κύριον τῶν πνευμάτων; PGM 5, 467 θεὸς θεῶν, ὁ κύριος τῶν πν.; sim. the magic pap PWarr 21, 24; 26 [III A.D.]); the πατὴρ τῶν πνευμάτων Hb 12:9. Intermediary beings (in polytheistic terminology: δαίμονες) that serve God are called λειτουργικὰ πνεύματα Hb 1:14. In Rv we read of the ἑπτὰ πνεύματα (τοῦ θεοῦ) 1:4; 3:1; 4:5; 5:6; s. ASkrinjar, Biblica 16, ’35, 1–24; 113–40.— Ghost Lk 24:37, 39.
    evil spirits (PGM 13, 798; 36, 160; TestJob 27, 2; ApcSed [both Satan]; AscIs 3:28; Just., D. 39, 6 al.; Ath. 25, 3), esp. in accounts of healing in the Synoptics: (τὸ) πνεῦμα (τὸ) ἀκάθαρτον (Just., D. 82, 3) Mt 12:43; Mk 1:23, 26; 3:30; 5:2, 8; 7:25; 9:25a; Lk 8:29; 9:42; 11:24; Rv 18:2. Pl. (TestBenj 5:2) Mt 10:1; Mk 1:27; 3:11; 5:13; 6:7; Lk 4:36; 6:18; Ac 5:16; 8:7; Rv 16:13; ending of Mk in the Freer ms.—τὸ πν. τὸ πονηρόν Ac 19:15f. Pl. (En 99:7; TestSim 4:9; 6:6, TestJud 16:1; Just., D. 76, 6) Lk 7:21; 8:2; Ac 19:12f.—πν. ἄλαλον Mk 9:17; cp. vs. 25b (s. ἄλαλος). πν. πύθων Ac 16:16 (s. πύθων). πν. ἀσθενείας Lk 13:11. Cp. 1 Ti 4:1b. πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου (s. δαιμόνιον 2) Lk 4:33. πνεύματα δαιμονίων Rv 16:14 (in effect = personified ‘exhalations’ of evil powers; for the combination of πν. and δαιμ. cp. the love spell Sb 4324, 16f τὰ πνεύματα τῶν δαιμόνων τούτων).—Abs. of a harmful spirit Mk 9:20; Lk 9:39; Ac 16:18. Pl. Mt 8:16; 12:45; Lk 10:20; 11:26.—1 Pt 3:19 (s. 2 above) belongs here if the πνεύματα refer to hostile spirit-powers, evil spirits, fallen angels (so FSpitta, Christi Predigt an die Geister 1890; HGunkel, Zum religionsgesch. Verständnis des NT 1903, 72f; WBousset, ZNW 19, 1920, 50–66; Rtzst., Herr der Grösse 1919, 25ff; Knopf, Windisch, FHauck ad loc.; BReicke, The Disobedient Spirits and Christian Baptism ’46, esp. 54–56, 69).—Hermas also has the concept of evil spirits that lead an independent existence, and live and reign within the inner life of a pers.; the Holy Spirit, who also lives or would like to live there, is forced out by them (cp. TestDan 4) Hm 5, 1, 2–4; 5, 2, 5–8; 10, 1, 2. τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον … ἕτερον πονηρὸν πν. 5, 1, 2. These πνεύματα are ὀξυχολία 5, 1, 3; 5, 2, 8 (τὸ πονηρότατον πν.); 10, 1, 2; διψυχία 9:11 (ἐπίγειον πν. ἐστι παρὰ τοῦ διαβόλου); 10, 1, 2; λύπη 10, 1, 2 (πάντων τῶν πνευμάτων πονηροτέρα) and other vices. On the complicated pneuma-concept of the Mandates of Hermas s. MDibelius, Hdb. exc. on Hm 5, 2, 7; cp. Leutzsch, Hermas 453f n. 133.
    God’s being as controlling influence, with focus on association with humans, Spirit, spirit as that which differentiates God fr. everything that is not God, as the divine power that produces all divine existence, as the divine element in which all divine life is carried on, as the bearer of every application of the divine will. All those who belong to God possess or receive this spirit and hence have a share in God’s life. This spirit also serves to distinguish Christians fr. all unbelievers (cp. PGM 4, 1121ff, where the spirit is greeted as one who enters devotees and, in accordance w. God’s will, separates them fr. themselves, i.e. fr. the purely human part of their nature); for this latter aspect s. esp. 6 below.
    the Spirit of God, of the Lord (=God) etc. (LXX; TestSim 4:4; JosAs 8:11; ApcSed 14:6; 15:6; ApcMos 43; SibOr 3, 701; Ps.-Phoc. 106; Philo; Joseph. [s. c below]; apolog. Cp. Plut., Numa 4, 6 πνεῦμα θεοῦ, capable of begetting children; s. παρθένος a) τὸ πν. τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:11b, 14; 3:16; 6:11; 1J 4:2a (Just., D. 49, 3; Tat. 13, 3; Ath. 22, 3). τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ πν. 1 Pt 4:14 (Just., A I, 60, 6). τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12b. τὸ πν. κυρίου Ac 5:9; B 6:14; B 9:2 (cp. Mel., P. 32, 222). τὸ πνεῦμά μου or αὐτοῦ: Mt 12:18 (Is 42:1); Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f.—Cp. 1QS 4:21); 1 Cor 2:10a v.l.; Eph 3:16; 1 Th 4:8 (where τὸ ἅγιον is added); 1J 4:13.—τὸ πν. τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν Mt 10:20. τὸ πν. τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν Ro 8:11a.—Without the art. πν. θεοῦ (JosAs 4:9; Tat. 15:3; Theoph. Ant. 1, 5 [p. 66, 18]) the Spirit of God Mt 3:16; 12:28; Ro 8:9b, 14, 19; 1 Cor 7:40; 12:3a; 2 Cor 3:3 (πν. θεοῦ ζῶντος); Phil 3:3. πν. κυρίου Lk 4:18 (Is 61:1); Ac 8:39 (like J 3:8; 20:22; Ac 2:4, this pass. belongs on the borderline betw. the mngs. ‘wind’ and ‘spirit’; cp. Diod S 3, 60, 3 Ἕσπερον ἐξαίφνης ὑπὸ πνευμάτων συναρπαγέντα μεγάλων ἄφαντον γενέσθαι ‘Hesperus [a son of Atlas] was suddenly snatched by strong winds and vanished fr. sight’. S. HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919, 19ff; OCullmann, TZ. 4, ’48, 364); 1 Cl 21:2.
    the Spirit of Christ, of the Lord (=Christ) etc. τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ Ac 16:7. τὸ πν. Χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:32. τὸ ἐν αὐτοῖς πν. Χριστοῦ 1 Pt 1:11. πν. Χριστοῦ Ro 8:9c. πν. τοῦ Χριστοῦ AcPl Ha 8, 18. ἀπὸ τοῦ πν. τοῦ χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:10. τὸ πν. Ἰης. Χριστοῦ Phil 1:19. τὸ πν. κυρίου 2 Cor 3:17b (JHermann, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61). τὸ πν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ (=θεοῦ) Gal 4:6. As possessor of the divine Spirit, and at the same time controlling its distribution among humans, Christ is called κύριος πνεύματος Lord of the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18 (s. Windisch ad loc.); but many prefer to transl. from the Lord who is the Spirit.—CMoule, OCullmann Festschr., ’72, 231–37.
    Because of its heavenly origin and nature this Spirit is called (the) Holy Spirit (cp. PGM 4, 510 ἵνα πνεύσῃ ἐν ἐμοὶ τὸ ἱερὸν πνεῦμα.—Neither Philo nor Josephus called the Spirit πν. ἅγιον; the former used θεῖον or θεοῦ πν., the latter πν. θεῖον: Ant. 4, 118; 8, 408; 10, 239; but ἅγιον πνεῦμα Orig. C. Cels 1, 40, 16).
    α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον (Is 63:10f; Ps 50:13; 142:10 v.l.; cp. Sus 45 Theod.; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 10 [Stone p. 10]; JosAs 8:11 [codd. ADE]; AscIs 3, 15, 26; Just., D. 36, 6 al.) Mt 12:32 = Mk 3:29 = Lk 12:10 (τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα; on the ‘sin against the Holy Spirit’ s. HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 96–112; AFridrichsen, Le péché contre le Saint-Esprit: RHPR 3, 1923, 367–72). Mk 12:36; 13:11; Lk 2:26; 3:22; 10:21; J 14:26; Ac 1:16; 2:33; 5:3, 32; 7:51; 8:18 v.l.; 10:44, 47; 11:15; 13:2; 15:8, 28; 19:6; 20:23, 28; 21:11; 28:25; Eph 1:13 (τὸ πν. τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τὸ ἅγιον); 4:30 (τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ); Hb 3:7; 9:8; 10:15; 1 Cl 13:1; 16:2; 18:11 (Ps 50:13); 22:1; IEph 9:1; Hs 5, 5, 2; 5, 6, 5–7 (on the relationship of the Holy Spirit to the Son in Hermas s. ALink, Christi Person u. Werk im Hirten des Hermas 1886; JvWalter, ZNW 14, 1913, 133–44; MDibelius, Hdb. exc. following Hs 5, 6, 8 p. 572–76).—τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα (Wsd 9:17; OdeSol 11:2; TestJob 51:2; ApcEsdr 7:16; Just. D. 25, 1 al.) Mt 28:19; Lk 12:10 (s. above), 12; Ac 1:8; 2:38 (epexegetic gen.); 4:31; 9:31; 10:45; 13:4; 16:6; 1 Cor 6:19; 2 Cor 13:13; 1J 5:7 v.l. (on the Comma Johanneum s. λόγο 3); GJs 24:4 (s. χρηματίζω 1bα). As the mother of Jesus GHb 20, 61 (HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 64ff; SHirsch, D. Vorstellg. v. e. weibl. πνεῦμα ἅγ. im NT u. in d. ältesten christl. Lit. 1927. Also WBousset, Hauptprobleme der Gnosis 1907, 9ff).
    β. without the art. (s. B-D-F §257, 2; Rob. 761; 795) πνεῦμα ἅγιον (PGM 3, 289; Da 5:12 LXX; PsSol 17:37; AssMos Fgm. b; Just., D. 4, 1 al.; Ath. 24, 1. S. also Da Theod. 4:8, 9, 18 θεοῦ πνεῦμα ἅγιον or πνεῦμα θεοῦ ἅγιον) Mk 1:8; Lk 1:15, 35, 41, 67; 2:25; 4:1; 11:13; J 20:22 (Cassien, La pentecôte johannique [J 20:19–23] ’39.—See also 1QS 4:20f); Ac 2:4a; 4:8; 7:55; 8:15, 17, 19; 9:17; 10:38; 11:24; 13:9; 19:2ab; Hb 2:4; 6:4; 1 Pt 1:12 v.l.; 1 Cl 2:2; AcPl 6:18; 9:4 (restored after Aa I 110, 11); AcPlCor 2:5.—So oft. in combination w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος ἁγίου Ac 1:2; 4:25; Ro 5:5; 2 Ti 1:14; 1 Cl 8:1 (cp. διὰ πν. αἰωνίου Hb 9:14). διὰ φωνῆς πν. ἁγίου AcPl Ha 11, 6. ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου (Eus., PE 3, 12, 3 of the Egyptians: ἐκ τ. πνεύματος οἴονται συλλαμβάνειν τὸν γῦπα. Here πνεῦμα= ‘wind’; s. Horapollo 1, 11 p. 14f. The same of other birds since Aristot.—On the neut. πνεῦμα as a masc. principle cp. Aristoxenus, Fgm. 13 of the two original principles: πατέρα μὲν φῶς, μητέρα δὲ σκότος) Mt 1:18, 20; IEph 18:2; GJs 14:2; 19:1 (pap). ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ (PsSol 17:37; ApcZeph; Ar. 15, 1) Mt 3:11; Mk 1:8 v.l.; Lk 3:16; J 1:33b; Ac 1:5 (cp. 1QS 3:7f); 11:16; Ro 9:1; 14:17; 15:16; 1 Cor 12:3b; 2 Cor 6:6; 1 Th 1:5; 1 Pt 1:12 (without ἐν v.l.); Jd 20. ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου 2 Pt 1:21. Cp. ἐν δυνάμει πνεύματος ἁγίου Ro 15:13, 19 v.l. (for πνεύματος θεοῦ). μετὰ χαρᾶς πνεύματος ἁγίου 1 Th 1:6. διὰ ἀνακαινώσεως πνεύματος ἁγίου Tit 3:5.
    abs.
    α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα. In this connection the art. is perh. used anaphorically at times, w. the second mention of a word (s. B-D-F §252; Rob. 762); perh. Mt 12:31 (looking back to vs. 28 πν. θεοῦ); Mk 1:10, 12 (cp. vs. 8 πν. ἅγιον); Lk 4:1b, 14 (cp. vs. 1a); Ac 2:4b (cp. vs. 4a).—As a rule it is not possible to assume that anaphora is present: Mt 4:1; J 1:32, 33a; 3:6a, 8b (in wordplay), 34; 7:39a; Ac 8:29; 10:19; 11:12, 28; 19:1 D; 20:3 D, 22; 21:4; Ro 8:23 (ἀπαρχή 1bβ; 2), 26a, 27; 12:11; 15:30; 2 Cor 1:22 and 5:5 (KErlemann, ZNW 83, ’92, 202–23, and s. ἀρραβών); 12:18 (τῷ αὐτῷ πν.); Gal 3:2, 5, 14 (ἐπαγγελία 1bβ); Eph 4:3 (gen. of the author); 6:17 (perh. epexegetic gen.); 1 Ti 4:1a; Js 4:5; 1J 3:24; 5:6ab (some mss. add καὶ πνεύματος to the words διʼ ὕδατος κ. αἵματος at the beg. of the verse; this is approved by HvSoden, Moffatt, Vogels, Merk, and w. reservations by CDodd, The Joh. Epistles ’46, TManson, JTS 48, ’47, 25–33), vs. 8; Rv 2:7, 11, 17, 29; 3:6, 13, 22; 14:13; 22:17; B 19:2, B 7= D 4:10 (s. ἐτοιμάζω b). ἐν τῷ πνεύματι (led) by the Spirit Lk 2:27.—Paul links this Spirit of God, known to every Christian, with Christ as liberating agent in contrast to legal constraint ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμα ἐστιν the Lord means Spirit 2 Cor 3:17a (UHolzmeister, 2 Cor 3:17 Dominus autem Spiritus est 1908; JNisius, Zur Erklärung v. 2 Cor 3:16ff: ZKT 40, 1916, 617–75; JKögel, Ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμά ἐστιν: ASchlatter Festschr. 1922, 35–46; C Guignebert, Congr. d’Hist. du Christ. II 1928, 7–22; EFuchs, Christus u. d. Geist b. Pls ’32; HHughes, ET 45, ’34, 235f; CLattey, Verb. Dom. 20, ’40, 187–89; DGriffiths ET 55, ’43, 81–83; HIngo, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61 [Paul]; JDunn, JTS 21, ’70, 309–20).
    β. without the art. πνεῦμα B 1:3. κοινωνία πνεύματος Phil 2:1 (κοινωνία 1 and 2). πνεύματι in the Spirit or through the Spirit Gal 3:3; 5:5, 16, 18; 1 Pt 4:6. εἰ ζῶμεν πνεύματι, πνεύματι καὶ στοιχῶμεν if we live by the Spirit, let us also walk by the Spirit Gal 5:25. Freq. used w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος 1 Pt 1:22 v.l. ἐξ (ὕδατος καὶ) πνεύματος J 3:5. ἐν πνεύματι in, by, through the Spirit Mt 22:43; Eph 2:22; 3:5; 5:18; 6:18; Col 1:8 (ἀγάπη ἐν πνεύματι love called forth by the Spirit); B 9:7. κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 8:4f; Gal 4:29. ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος 2 Th 2:13; 1 Pt 1:2 (s. ἁγιασμός).—In neg. expressions: οὔπω ἧν πνεῦμα the Spirit had not yet come J 7:39b. ψυχικοὶ πνεῦμα μὴ ἔχοντες worldly people, who do not have the Spirit Jd 19.—ἓν πνεῦμα one and the same Spirit 1 Cor 12:13; Eph 2:18; 4:4; one (in) Spirit 1 Cor 6:17.
    The Spirit is more closely defined by a gen. of thing: τὸ πν. τῆς ἀληθείας (TestJud 20:5) J 14:17; 15:26; 16:13 (in these three places the Spirit of Truth is the Paraclete promised by Jesus upon his departure); 1J 4:6 (opp. τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πλάνης, as TestJud 20:1; PsSol 8:14 πλ. πλανήσεως; Just., D. 7, 3 πλάνου καὶ ἀκαθάρτου πνεύματος; cp. 1QS 4:23); τὸ τῆς δόξης πν. 1 Pt 4:14. τὸ πν. τῆς ζωῆς the Spirit of life Ro 8:2. το πν. τῆς πίστεως 2 Cor 4:13. πν. σοφίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως Eph 1:17 (cp. Just., D. 87, 4). πν. υἱοθεσίας Ro 8:15b (opp. πν. δουλείας vs. 15a). πν. δυνάμεως AcPl Ha 8, 25. πν. δυνάμεως καὶ ἀγάπης καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 2 Ti 1:7 (opp. πν. δειλίας). τὸ πν. τῆς χάριτος (s. TestJud 24:2) Hb 10:29 (Zech 12:10); cp. 1 Cl 46:6.
    Of Christ ‘it is written’ in Scripture: (ἐγένετο) ὁ ἔσχατος Ἀδὰμ εἰς πνεῦμα ζῳοποιοῦν 1 Cor 15:45. The scripture pass. upon which the first part of this verse is based is Gen 2:7, where Wsd 15:11 also substitutes the words πνεῦμα ζωτικόν for πνοὴν ζωῆς (cp. Just., D. 6, 2). On the other hand, s. Philo, Leg. All. 1, 42 and s. the lit. s.v. Ἀδάμ ad loc.
    The (divine) Pneuma stands in contrast to everything that characterizes this age or the finite world gener.: οὐ τὸ πν. τοῦ κόσμου ἀλλὰ τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12; cp. Eph 2:2 and 1 Ti 4:1ab.
    α. in contrast to σάρξ, which is more closely connected w. sin than any other earthly material (Just., D. 135, 6): J 3:6; Ro 8:4–6, 9a, 13; Gal 3:3; 5:17ab; 6:8. Cp. B 10:9. πᾶσα ἐπιθυμία κατὰ τοῦ πνεύματος στρατεύεται Pol 5:3.
    β. in contrast to σῶμα (=σάρξ) Ro 8:10 and to σάρξ (=σῶμα, as many hold) J 6:63a (for τὸ πν. ἐστιν τὸ ζῳοποιοῦν cp. Philo, Op. Mund. 30; Herm. Wr. in Cyrill., C. Jul. I 556c=542, 24 Sc. the pneuma τὰ πάντα ζῳοποιεῖ καὶ τρέφει. S. also f above). Cp. Ro 8:11b.
    γ. in contrast to γράμμα, which is the characteristic quality of God’s older declaration of the divine will in the law: Ro 2:29; 7:6; 2 Cor 3:6ab, 8 (cp. vs. 7).
    δ. in contrast to the wisdom of humans 1 Cor 2:13.
    the Spirit of God as exhibited in the character or activity of God’s people or selected agents, Spirit, spirit (s. HPreisker, Geist u. Leben ’33).
    πνεῦμα is accompanied by another noun, which characterizes the working of the Spirit more definitely: πνεῦμα καὶ δύναμις spirit and power Lk 1:17; 1 Cor 2:4. Cp. Ac 10:38; 1 Th 1:5. πνεῦμα καὶ ζωή J 6:63b. πνεῦμα κ. σοφία Ac 6:3; cp. vs. 10 (cp. TestReub 2:6 πνεῦμα λαλίας). πίστις κ. πνεῦμα ἅγιον 6:5 (cp. Just., D. 135, 6). χαρὰ καὶ πνεῦμα ἅγ. 13:52.
    Unless frustrated by humans in their natural condition, the Spirit of God produces a spiritual type of conduct Gal 5:16, 25 and produces the καρπὸς τοῦ πνεύματος vs. 22 (s. Vögtle under πλεονεξία).
    The Spirit inspires certain people of God B 12:2; B 13:5, above all, in their capacity as proclaimers of a divine revelation (Strabo 9, 3, 5 the πνεῦμα ἐνθουσιαστικόν, that inspired the Pythia; Περὶ ὕψους 13, 2; 33, 5 of the divine πν. that impels prophets and poets to express themselves; schol. on Pla. 856e of a μάντις: ἄνωθεν λαμβάνειν τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ πληροῦσθαι τοῦ θεοῦ; Aristobulus in Eus., PE 8, 10, 4 [=Fgm. 2, 4 p. 136 Holladay] τὸ θεῖον πν., καθʼ ὸ̔ καὶ προφήτης ἀνακεκήρυκται ‘[Moses possessed] the Divine Spirit with the result that he was proclaimed a prophet’; AscIs 1:7 τὸ πν. τὸ λαλοῦν ἐν ἐμοί; AssMos Fgm. f εἶδεν πνεύματι ἐπαρθείς; Just., A I, 38, 1 al.; Ath. 10, 3 τὸ προφητικὸν πν. Cp. Marinus, Vi. Procli 23 of Proclus: οὐ γὰρ ἄνευ θείας ἐπινοίας … διαλέγεσθαι; Orig., C. Cels. 3, 28, 23). προφητεία came into being only as ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου φερόμενοι ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 2 Pt 1:21; cp. Ac 15:29 v.l.; cp. 1 Cl 8:1. David Mt 22:43; Mk 12:36; cp. Ac 1:16; 4:25. Isaiah Ac 28:25. Moses B 10:2, B 9; the Spirit was also active in giving the tables of the law to Moses 14:2. Christ himself spoke in the OT διὰ τοῦ πνεύματος τοῦ ἁγίου 1 Cl 22:1. The ἱεραὶ γραφαί are called αἱ διὰ τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἁγίου 45:2.—The Christian prophet Agabus also ἐσήμαινεν διὰ τοῦ πν. Ac 11:28; cp. Ac 21:11. Likew. Ign. IPhld 7:2. In general the Spirit reveals the most profound secrets to those who believe 1 Cor 2:10ab.—1 Cl claims to be written διὰ τοῦ ἁγ. πν. 63:2. On Ac 19:21 s. 3b.
    The Spirit of God, being one, shows the variety and richness of its life in the different kinds of spiritual gifts which are granted to certain Christians 1 Cor 12:4, 7, 11; cp. vs. 13ab.—Vss. 8–10 enumerate the individual gifts of the Spirit, using various prepositions: διὰ τοὺ πν. vs. 8a; κατὰ τὸ πν. vs. 8b; ἐν τῷ πν. vs. 9ab. τὸ πν. μὴ σβέννυτε do not quench the Spirit 1 Th 5:19 refers to the gift of prophecy, acc. to vs. 20.—The use of the pl. πνεύματα is explained in 1 Cor 14:12 by the varied nature of the Spirit’s working; in vs. 32 by the number of persons who possess the prophetic spirit; on the latter s. Rv 22:6 and 19:10.
    One special type of spiritual gift is represented by ecstatic speaking. Of those who ‘speak in tongues’ that no earthly person can understand: πνεύματι λαλεῖ μυστήρια expresses secret things in a spiritual way 1 Cor 14:2. Cp. vss. 14–16 and s. νοῦς 1b. τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπερεντυγχάνει στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις the Spirit pleads in our behalf with groans beyond words Ro 8:26b. Of speech that is ecstatic, but expressed in words that can be understood λαλεῖν ἐν πνεύματι D 11:7, 8; cp. vs. 9 (on the subject-matter 1 Cor 12:3; Jos., Ant. 4, 118f; TestJob 43:2 ἀναλαβὼν Ἐλιφᾶς πν. εἶπεν ὕμνον). Of the state of mind of the seer of the Apocalypse: ἐν πνεύματι Rv 17:3; 21:10; γενέσθαι ἐν πν. 1:10; 4:2 (s. γίνομαι 5c, ἐν 4c and EMoering, StKr 92, 1920, 148–54; RJeske, NTS 31, ’85, 452–66); AcPl Ha 6, 27. On the Spirit at Pentecost Ac 2:4 s. KLake: Beginn. I 5, ’33, 111–21. κατασταλέντος τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἐν Μύρτῃ when the Spirit (of prophecy) that was in Myrta ceased speaking AcPl Ha 7, 9.
    The Spirit leads and directs Christian missionaries in their journeys (Aelian, NA 11, 16 the young women are led blindfolded to the cave of the holy serpent; they are guided by a πνεῦμα θεῖον) Ac 16:6, 7 (by dreams, among other methods; cp. vs. 9f and s. Marinus, Vi. Procli 27: Proclus ἔφασκεν προθυμηθῆναι μὲν πολλάκις γράψαι, κωλυθῆναι δὲ ἐναργῶς ἔκ τινων ἐνυπνίων). In Ac 16:6–7 τὸ ἅγιον πν. and τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ are distinguished.
    an activating spirit that is not fr. God, spirit: πν. ἔτερον a different (kind of) spirit 2 Cor 11:4. Cp. 2 Th 2:2; 1J 4:1–3. Because there are persons activated by such spirits, it is necessary to test the var. kinds of spirits (the same problem Artem. 3, 20 περὶ διαφορᾶς μάντεων, οἷς δεῖ προσέχειν καὶ οἷς μή) 1 Cor 12:10; 1J 4:1b. ὁ διάβολος πληροῖ αὐτὸν αὐτοῦ πν. Hm 11:3. Also οὐκ οἴδατε ποίου πνεύματός ἐστε Lk 9:55 v.l. distinguishes betw. the spirit shown by Jesus’ disciples, and another kind of spirit.—Even more rarely a spirit divinely given that is not God’s own; so (in a quot. fr. Is 29:10) a πνεῦμα κατανύξεως Ro 11:8.
    an independent transcendent personality, the Spirit, which appears in formulas that became more and more fixed and distinct (cp. Ath. 12, 2; Hippol., Ref. 7, 26, 2.—Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 12 θεόν, υἱόν πατρός, πνεῦμα ἐκ πατρὸς ἐκπορευόμενον ἓν ἐκ τριῶν καὶ ἐξ ἑνὸς τρία, ταῦτα νόμιζε Ζῆνα, τόνδʼ ἡγοῦ θεόν=‘God, son of the father, spirit proceeding from the father, one from three and three from one, consider these as Zeus, think of this one as God’. The entire context bears a Christian impress.—As Aion in gnostic speculation Iren. 1, 2, 5 [Harv. I 21, 2]): βαπτίζοντες αὐτοὺς εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ τοῦ υἱοῦ καὶ τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος Mt 28:19 (on the text s. βαπτίζω 2c; on the subject-matter GWalther, Die Entstehung des Taufsymbols aus dem Taufritus: StKr 95, 1924, 256ff); D 7:1, 3. Cp. 2 Cor 13:13; 1 Cl 58:2; IEph 9:1; IMg 13:1b, 2; MPol 14:3; 22:1, 3; Epil Mosq 5. On this s. HUsener, Dreiheit: RhM 58, 1903, 1ff; 161ff; 321ff; esp. 36ff; EvDobschütz, Zwei-u. dreigliedrige Formeln: JBL 50, ’31, 116–47 (also Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 92–100); Norden, Agn. Th. 228ff; JMainz, Die Bed. der Dreizahl im Judentum 1922; Clemen2 125–28; NSöderblom, Vater, Sohn u. Geist 1909; DNielsen, Der dreieinige Gott I 1922; GKrüger, Das Dogma v. der Dreieinigkeit 1905, 46ff; AHarnack, Entstehung u. Entwicklung der Kirchenverfassung 1910, 187ff; JHaussleiter, Trinitarischer Glaube u. Christusbekenntnis in der alten Kirche: BFCT XXV 4, 1920; JLebreton, Histoire du dogme de la Trinité I: Les origines6 1927; RBlümel, Pls u. d. dreieinige Gott 1929.—On the whole word FRüsche, D. Seelenpneuma ’33; HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919; EBurton, ICC Gal 1921, 486–95; PVolz, Der Geist Gottes u. d. verwandten Erscheinungen im AT 1910; JHehn, Zum Problem des Geistes im alten Orient u. im AT: ZAW n.s. 2, 1925, 210–25; SLinder, Studier till Gamla Testamentets föreställningar om anden 1926; AMarmorstein, Der Hl. Geist in der rabb. Legende: ARW 28, 1930, 286–303; NSnaith, The Distinctive Ideas of the OT ’46, 229–37; FDillistone, Bibl. Doctrine of the Holy Spirit: Theology Today 3, ’46/47, 486–97; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 341–46; ESchweizer, CDodd Festschr., ’56, 482–508; DLys, Rûach, Le Souffle dans l’AT, ’62; DHill, Gk. Words and Hebr. Mngs. ’67, 202–93.—HGunkel, Die Wirkungen des Hl. Geistes2 1899; HWeinel, Die Wirkungen des Geistes u. der Geister im nachap. Zeitalter 1899; EWinstanley, The Spirit in the NT 1908; HSwete, The Holy Spirit in the NT 1909, The Holy Spirit in the Ancient Church 1912; EScott, The Spirit in the NT 1923; FBüchsel, Der Geist Gottes im NT 1926; EvDobschütz, Der Geistbesitz des Christen im Urchristentum: Monatsschr. für Pastoral-theol. 20, 1924, 228ff; FBadcock, ‘The Spirit’ and Spirit in the NT: ET 45, ’34, 218–21; RBultmann, Theologie des NT ’48, 151–62 (Eng. tr. KGrobel, ’51, I 153–64); ESchweizer, Geist u. Gemeinde im NT ’52, Int 6, ’52, 259–78.—WTosetti, Der Hl. Geist als göttliche Pers. in den Evangelien 1918; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion. Der Ursprung des Geistbegriffs der Syn. Ev. aus der griech. Mystik 1922; AFrövig, Das Sendungsbewusstsein Jesu u. der Geist 1924; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist nach Syn. Überl.: Studies in Early Christianity, presented to FCPorter and BWBacon 1928, 209–36; FSynge, The Holy Spirit in the Gospels and Acts: CQR 120, ’35, 205–17; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit and the Gospel Trad. ’47.—ESokolowski, Die Begriffe Geist u. Leben bei Pls 1903; KDeissner, Auferstehungshoffnung u. Pneumagedanke bei Pls 1912; GVos, The Eschatological Aspect of the Pauline Conception of the Spirit: Bibl. and Theol. Studies by the Faculty of Princeton Theol. Sem. 1912, 209–59; HBertrams, Das Wesen des Geistes nach d. Anschauung des Ap. Pls 1913; WReinhard, Das Wirken des Hl. Geistes im Menschen nach den Briefen des Ap. Pls 1918; HHoyle, The Holy Spirit in St. Paul 1928; PGächter, Z. Pneumabegriff des hl. Pls: ZKT 53, 1929, 345–408; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik des Ap. Pls 1930, 159–74 al. [Mysticism of Paul the Apostle, tr. WMontgomery ’31, 160–76 al.]; E-BAllo, RB 43, ’34, 321–46 [1 Cor]; Ltzm., Hdb. exc. after Ro 8:11; Synge [s. above], CQR 119, ’35, 79–93 [Pauline epp.]; NWaaning, Onderzoek naar het gebruik van πνεῦμα bij Pls, diss. Amsterd. ’39; RJewett, Paul’s Anthropological Terms, ’71, 167–200.—HvBaer, Der Hl. Geist in den Lukasschriften 1926; MGoguel, La Notion joh. de l’Esprit 1902; JSimpson, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: Exp., 9th ser., 4, 1925, 292–99; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist im J.: Amicitiae Corolla (RHarris Festschr.) ’33, 303–18; WLofthouse, The Holy Spirit in Ac and J: ET 52, ’40/41, 334–36; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: JTS 1 n.s., ’50, 1–15; FCrump, Pneuma in the Gospels, diss. Catholic Univ. of America, ’54; GLampe, Studies in the Gospels (RHLightfoot memorial vol.) ’55, 159–200; NHamilton, The Holy Spirit and Eschatology in Paul, ’57; WDavies, Paul and the Dead Sea Scrolls, Flesh and Spirit: The Scrolls and the NT, ed. KStendahl, ’57, 157–82.—GJohnston, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Holy Spirit’ in the Qumran Lit.: NT Sidelights (ACPurdy Festschr.) ’60, 27–42; JPryke, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Flesh’ in Qumran and NT, RevQ 5, ’65, 346–60; HBraun, Qumran und d. NT II, ’66, 150–64; DHill, Greek Words and Hebrew Meanings, ’67, 202–93; WBieder, Pneumatolog. Aspekte im Hb, OCullmann Festschr. ’72, 251–59; KEasley, The Pauline Usage of πνεύματι as a Reference to the Spirit of God: JETS 27, ’84, 299–313 (statistics).—B. 260; 1087. Pauly-W. XIV 387–412. BHHW I 534–37. Schmidt, Syn. II 218–50. New Docs 4, 38f. DELG s.v. πνέω. M-M. Dict. de la Bible XI 126–398. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πνεῦμα

  • 13 auctor

    auctor (incorrectly written autor or author), ōris, comm. [id.], he that brings about the existence of any object, or promotes the increase or prosperity of it, whether he first originates it, or by his efforts gives greater permanence or continuance to it; to be differently translated according to the object, creator, maker, author, inventor, producer, father, founder, teacher, composer, cause, voucher, supporter, leader, head, etc. (syn.: conditor, origo, consiliarius, lator, suasor, princeps, dux).
    I.
    Lit.
    A.
    Of persons, a progenitor, father, ancestor:

    L. Brutus, praeclarus auctor nobilitatis tuae,

    the founder, progenitor of your nobility, Cic. Tusc. 4, 1, 2:

    generis,

    Verg. A. 4, 365; so Ov. M. 4, 640, and Suet. Vit. 2:

    tu sanguinis ultimus auctor,

    Verg. A. 7, 49; so Ov. M. 12, 558, and 13, 142:

    tantae propaginis,

    id. F. 3, 157:

    originis,

    Suet. Ner. 1:

    gentis,

    id. Claud. 25:

    auctores parentes animarum,

    Vulg. Sap. 12, 6:

    auctore ab illo ducit originem,

    Hor. C. 3, 17, 5:

    Sive neglectum genus et nepotes Respicis auctor,

    id. ib. 1, 2, 36:

    mihi Tantalus auctor,

    Ov. M. 6, 172:

    auctores saxa fretumque tui,

    id. H. 10, 132:

    Juppiter e terrā genitam mentitur, ut auctor Desinat inquiri,

    id. M. 1, 615.—Of animals, Col. 6, 27, 1.—
    B.
    Of buildings, etc., founder, builder:

    Trojae Cynthius auctor,

    Verg. G. 3, 36:

    murorum Romulus auctor,

    Prop. 5, 6, 43 ( augur, Müll.):

    auctor posuisset in oris Moenia,

    Ov. M. 15, 9:

    porticus auctoris Livia nomen habet,

    id. A. A. 1, 72:

    amphitheatri,

    Plin. 36, 15, 24, § 118:

    omnia sub titulo tantum suo ac sine ullā pristini auctoris memoriā,

    Suet. Dom. 5.—
    C.
    Of works of art, a maker, artist:

    statua auctoris incerti,

    Plin. 34, 8, 19, § 93: apparuit summam artis securitatem auctori placaisse, id. praef. § 27.—
    II.
    Transf.
    A.
    In gen., the originator, executor, performer, doer, cause, occasion of other things (freq. interchanged with actor):

    tametsi haud quaquam par gloriá sequitur scriptorem et auctorem rerum, tamen etc.,

    Sall. C. 3, 2 Kritz (cf. without rerum: Suam quisque culpam auctores ad negotia transferunt, id. J. 1, 4):

    praeclari facinoris,

    Vell. 2, 120, 6:

    facti,

    Ov. M. 9, 206; Vell. 1, 8:

    cum perquirerent auctorem facti,

    Vulg. Jud. 6, 29:

    optimi statūs auctor,

    Suet. Aug. 28:

    honoris,

    Ov. M. 10, 214:

    vitae,

    Vulg. Act. 3, 15:

    salutis,

    ib. Heb. 2, 10:

    fidei,

    ib. ib. 12, 2:

    funeris,

    Ov. M. 10, 199:

    necis,

    id. ib. 8, 449;

    9, 214: mortis,

    id. ib. 8, 493:

    vulneris,

    id. ib. 5, 133;

    8, 418: plagae,

    id. ib. 3, 329:

    seditionis sectae,

    Vulg. Act. 24, 5.—Also, in gen., one from whom any thing proceeds or comes:

    auctor in incerto est: jaculum de parte sinistrā Venit,

    i. e. the sender, Ov. M. 12, 419; so,

    teli,

    id. ib. 8, 349:

    muneris,

    the giver, id. ib. 2, 88;

    5, 657, 7, 157 al.: meritorum,

    id. ib. 8, 108 al.—
    B.
    An author of scientific or literary productions.
    1.
    An investigator:

    non sordidus auctor Naturae verique,

    Hor. C. 1, 28, 14.—And as imparting learning, a teacher:

    quamquam in antiquissimā philosophiā Cratippo auctore versaris,

    Cic. Off. 2, 2, 8:

    dicendi gravissimus auctor et magister Plato,

    id. Or. 3, 10:

    divini humanique juris auctor celeberrimus,

    Vell. 2, 26, 2:

    Servius Sulpicius, juris civilis auctor,

    Gell. 2, 10; Dig. 19, 1, 39; 40, 7, 36.—
    2.
    The author of a writing, a writer:

    ii quos nunc lectito auctores,

    Cic. Att. 12, 18:

    ingeniosus poëta et auctor valde bonus,

    id. Mur. 14:

    scripta auctori perniciosa suo,

    Ov. Tr. 5, 1, 68:

    Belli Alexandrini Africique et Hispaniensis incertus auctor est,

    Suet. Caes. 56; id. Aug. 31:

    sine auctore notissimi versus,

    i. e. anonymous verses, id. ib. 70; so id. Calig. 8; id. Dom. 8 al.— Meton. of cause for effect, for a literary production, writing, work:

    in evolvendis utriusque linguae auctoribus, etc.,

    Suet. Aug. 89. —In partic., the author of historical works, an historian (with and without rerum):

    ego cautius posthac historiam attingam, te audiente, quem rerum Romanarum auctorem laudare possum religiosissimum,

    Cic. Brut. 11, 44; so,

    Matrem Antoniam non apud auctores rerum, non diurnā actorum scripturā reperio ullo insigni officio functam,

    Tac. A. 3, 3; 3, 30 (diff. from auctor rerum in II. A.):

    Polybius bonus auctor in primis,

    Cic. Off. 3, 32, 113; so Nep. Them. 10, 4; Liv. 4, 20; Tac. A. 5, 9; 14, 64 al.—With historiae (eccl. Lat.):

    historiae congruit auctori,

    Vulg. 2 Macc. 2, 31.—Hence, in gen., one that gives an account of something, a narrator, reporter, informant (orally or in writing):

    sibi insidias fieri: se id certis auctoribus comperisse,

    Cic. Att. 14, 8:

    celeberrimos auctores habeo tantam victoribus irreverentiam fuisse, ut, etc.,

    Tac. H. 3, 51:

    criminis ficti auctor, i. e. nuntius,

    Ov. M. 7, 824:

    Non haec tibi nuntiat auctor Ambiguus,

    id. ib. 11, 666; 12, 58; 12, 61; 12, 532.—Hence, auctorem esse, with acc. and inf., to relate, recount:

    Auctores sunt ter novenis punctis interfici hominem,

    Plin. 11, 21, 24, § 73:

    Fabius Rustiçus auctor est scriptos esse ad Caecinam Tuscum codicillos,

    Tac. A. 13, 20:

    Auctor est Julius Marathus ante paucos quam nasceretur menses prodigium Romae factum (esse) publice, etc.,

    Suet. Aug. 94 et saep.—
    C.
    One by whose influence, advice, command, etc., any thing is done, the cause, occasion, contriver, instigator, counsellor, adviser, promoter; constr. sometimes with ut, acc. and inf., or gen. gerund.: quid mihi es auctor ( what do you counsel me?) huic ut mittam? Plaut. Ps. 1, 3, 2; 4, 7, 70; id. Poen. 1, 3, 1:

    idne estis auctores mihi?

    Ter. Ad. 5, 8, 16:

    mihique ut absim, vehementer auctor est,

    Cic. Att. 15, 5:

    Gellium ipsis (philosophis) magno opere auctorem fuisse, ut controversiarum facerent modum,

    id. Leg. 1, 20, 53:

    ut propinqui de communi sententiā coërcerent, auctor fuit,

    Suet. Tib. 35; id. Claud. 25; id. Calig. 15:

    a me consilium petis, qui sim tibi auctor in Siciliāne subsidas, an proficiscare,

    Cic. Fam. 6, 8: ego quidem tibi non sim auctor, si Pompeius Italiam reliquit, te quoque profugere, Att. ap. Cic. Att. 9, 10:

    ne auctor armorum duxque deesset, Auct. B. G. 8, 47: auctor facinori non deerat,

    Liv. 2, 54:

    auctores Bibulo fuere tantundem pollicendi,

    Suet. Caes. 19:

    auctores restituendae tribuniciae potestatis,

    id. ib. 5; so id. Dom. 8:

    auctor singulis universisque conspirandi simul et ut... communem causam juvarent,

    id. Galb. 10 al. —So freq. in the abl. absol.: me, te, eo auctore, at my, your, his instance, by my [p. 199] advice, command, etc.:

    non me quidem Faciet auctore, hodie ut illum decipiat,

    Plaut. Stich. 4, 2, 23:

    an paenitebat flagiti, te auctore quod fecisset Adulescens?

    Ter. Eun. 5, 6, 12:

    quare omnes istos me auctore deridete atque contemnite,

    Cic. de Or. 3, 14, 54:

    quia calida fomenta non proderant, frigidis curari coactus auctore Antonio Musā,

    Suet. Aug. 81; 96; id. Galb. 19; id. Vit. 2 al.: agis Carminibus grates et dis auctoribus horum, the promoters or authors of spells, Ov. M. 7, 148.—
    2.
    Esp., in political lang., t. t.
    a.
    Auctor legis.
    (α).
    One who proposes a law, a mover, proposer (very rare):

    quarum legum auctor fuerat, earum suasorem se haud dubium ferebat,

    Liv. 6, 36:

    Quid desperatius, qui ne ementiendo quidem potueris auctorem adumbrare meliorem,

    Cic. Dom. 30, 80.—
    (β).
    One who advises the proposal of a law, and exerts all his influence to have it passed, a supporter (stronger than suasor; cf. Suet. Tib. 27:

    alium dicente, auctore eo Senatum se adīsse, verba mutare et pro auctore suasorem dicere coegit): isti rationi neque lator quisquam est inventus neque auctor umquam bonus,

    Cic. Leg. 3, 15, 34:

    cum ostenderem, si lex utilis plebi Romanae mihi videretur, auctorem me atque adjutorem futurum (esse),

    id. Agr. 2, 5; id. Att. 1, 19:

    quo auctore societatem cum Perseo junxerunt,

    Liv. 45, 31; Suet. Oth. 8; id. Vesp. 11 al.—Sometimes in connection with suasor:

    atque hujus deditionis ipse Postumius suasor et auctor fuit,

    Cic. Off. 3, 30, 109:

    Nisi quis retinet, idem suasor auctorque consilii ero,

    Tac. H. 3, 2 al. —
    (γ).
    Of a senate which accepts or adopts a proposition for a law, a confirmer, ratifier:

    nunc cum loquar apud senatores populi Romani, legum et judiciorum et juris auctores,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 67.— Poet., in gen., a law-giver:

    animum ad civilia vertet Jura suum, legesque feret justissimus auctor,

    Ov. M. 15, 833;

    and of one who establishes conditions of peace: leges captis justissimus auctor imposuit,

    id. ib. 8, 101. —Hence, auctores fieri, to approve, accept, confirm a law:

    cum de plebe consulem non accipiebat, patres ante auctores fieri coëgerit,

    Cic. Brut. 14, 55:

    Decreverunt ut, cum populus regem jussisset, id sic ratum esset, si patres auctores fierent,

    Liv. 1, 17; 1, 22; 2, 54; 2, 56; 6, 42; 8, 12 al.—
    b.
    Auctor consilii publici, he who has the chief voice in the senate, a leader:

    hunc rei publicae rectorem et consilii publici auctorem esse habendum,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 48, 211; 3, 17, 63. —Also absol.:

    regem Ariobarzanem, cujus salutem a senatu te auctore, commendatam habebam,

    by your influence, and the decree of the senate occasioned by it, Cic. Fam. 15, 4, 6; cf. Gron. ad Liv. 24, 43.—
    D.
    One who is an exemplar, a model, pattern, type of any thing:

    Caecilius, malus auctor Latinitatis,

    Cic. Att. 7, 3, 10:

    nec litterarum Graecarum, nec philosophiae jam ullum auctorem requiro,

    id. Ac. 2, 2, 5; cf.

    Wopk. Lect. Tull. p. 34: unum cedo auctorem tui facti, unius profer exemplum,

    i. e. who has done a similar thing, Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 26:

    Cato omnium virtutum auctor,

    id. Fin. 4, 16, 44 al. —
    E.
    One that becomes security for something, a voucher, bail, surety, witness:

    id ita esse ut credas, rem tibi auctorem dabo,

    Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 70:

    auctorem rumorem habere,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 19: fama nuntiabat te esse in Syriā;

    auctor erat nemo,

    id. Fam. 12, 4:

    non si mihi Juppiter auctor Spondeat,

    Verg. A. 5, 17:

    gravis quamvis magnae rei auctor,

    Liv. 1, 16:

    auctorem levem, nec satis fidum super tantā re Patres rati,

    id. 5, 15 fin.:

    urbs auspicato deis auctoribus in aeternum condita,

    under the guaranty of the gods, id. 28, 28.—Also with acc. and inf.:

    auctores sumus tutam ibi majestatem Romani nominis fore,

    Liv. 2, 48.—
    F.
    In judic. lang., t. t.
    1.
    A seller, vender (inasmuch as he warrants the right of possession of the thing to be sold, and transfers it to the purchaser; sometimes the jurists make a distinction between auctor primus and auctor secundus; the former is the seller himself, the latter the bail or security whom the former brings, Dig. 21, 2, 4; cf.

    Salmas. Mod. Usur. pp. 728 and 733): quod a malo auctore emīssent,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 22:

    auctor fundi,

    id. Caecin. 10; Dig. 19, 1, 52: Inpero (auctor ego sum), ut tu me quoivis castrandum loces, Plaut. Aul. 2, 2, 73 Wagn.; id. Ep. 3, 2, 21; id. Curc. 4, 2, 12.— Trop.:

    auctor beneficii populi Romani,

    Cic. Mur. 2.—
    2.
    A guardian, trustee (of women and minors):

    dos quam mulier nullo auctore dixisset,

    Cic. Caecin. 25:

    majores nostri nullam ne privatam quidem rem agere feminas sine auctore voluerunt,

    Liv. 34, 2:

    pupillus obligari tutori eo auctore non potest,

    Dig. 26, 8, 5.—
    3.
    In espousals, auctores are the witnesses of the marriage contract (parents, brothers, guardians, relatives, etc.):

    nubit genero socrus, nullis auspicibus, nullis auctoribus,

    Cic. Clu. 5.—
    G.
    An agent, factor, spokesman, intercessor, champion:

    praeclarus iste auctor suae civitatis,

    Cic. Fl. 22:

    (Plancius) princeps inter suos... maximarum societatum auctor, plurimarum magister,

    id. Planc. 13, 22:

    meae salutis,

    id. Sest. 50, 107:

    doloris sui, querelarum, etc.,

    id. Fl. 22 fin.
    In class.
    Lat. auctor is also used as fem.:

    eas aves, quibus auctoribus etc.,

    Cic. Div. 1, 15, 27:

    Et hostes aderant et (Theoxena) auctor mortis instabat,

    Liv. 40, 4, 15:

    auctor ego (Juno) audendi,

    Verg. A. 12, 159; Ov. M. 8, 108; id. F. 5, 192; 6, 709; id. H. 14, 110; 15, 3; Sen. Med. 968; cf. Paul. ex Fest. p. 29 Müll. The distinction which the grammarians, Serv. ad Verg. A. 12, 159, Prob. p. 1452 sq. P., and others make between auctor fem. and auctrix, that auctrix would refer more to the lit. signif. of the verb, augeo, while auctor fem. has more direct relation to the prevailing signif. of its noun, auctoritas, is unfounded.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > auctor

  • 14 लोकः _lōkḥ

    लोकः [लोक्यते$सौ लोक्-घञ्]
    1 The world, a division of the universe; (roughly speaking there are three lokas स्वर्ग, पृथ्वी and पाताल, but according to fuller classifica- tion the lokas are fourteen, seven higher regions rising from the earth one above the other, i. e. भूर्लोक, भुवर्लोक, स्वर्लोक, महर्लोक, जनर्लोक, तपर्लोक, and सत्यलोक or ब्रह्मलोक; and seven lower regions, descending from the earth one below the other; i. e. अतल, वितल, सुतल, रसातल, तलातल, महातल, and पाताल).
    -2 The earth, terrestrial world (भूलोक); इह- लोके in this world (opp. परत्र).
    -3 The human race, mankind, men, as in लोकातिग, लोकोत्तर &c. q. v.
    -4 The people or subjects (opp. the king); स्वसुखनिरभिलाषः खिद्यसे लोकहेतोः Ś.5.7; R.4.8.
    -5 A collection, group, class, com- pany; आकृष्टलीलान् नरलोकपालान् R.6.1; or शशाम तेन क्षितिपाल- लोकः 7.3.
    -6 A region, tract, district, province.
    -7 Common life, ordinary practice (of the world); लोकवत्तु लीलाकैवल्यम् Br. Sūt.II.1.33; यथा लोके कस्यचिदाप्तैषणस्य राज्ञः &c. S. B. (and diverse other places of the same work).
    -8 Common or worldly usage (opp. Vedic usage or idiom); वेदोक्ता वैदिकाः शब्दाः सिद्धा लोकाच्च लौकिकाः, प्रियतद्धिता दाक्षिणात्या यथा लोके वेदे चेति प्रयोक्तव्ये यथा लौकिक- वैदिकेष्विति प्रयुञ्जते Mbh. (and in diverse other places); अतो$स्मि लोके वेदे च प्रथितः पुरुषोत्तमः Bg.15.18.
    -9 Sight, looking.
    -1 The number 'seven', or 'fourteen'.
    -11 Ved. Open space; space, room.
    -12 One's own nature (निजस्वरूप); नष्टस्मृतिः पुनरयं प्रवृणीत लोकम् Bhāg.3. 31.15.
    -13 Enlightenment (प्रकाश); इच्छामि कालेन न यस्य विप्लवस्तस्यात्मलोकावरणस्य मोक्षम् Bhāg.8.3.25.
    -14 Recom- pense (फल); अग्नावेव देवेषु लोकमिच्छन्ते Bṛi. Up.1.4.15.
    -15 An object of enjoyment (भोग्यवस्तु); अथो अयं वा आत्मा सर्वेषां भूतानां लोकः Bṛi. Up 1.4.16.
    -16 Sight, the faculty of seeing (चक्षुरिन्द्रिय); अग्निर्लोकः Bṛi. Up.3.9. 1.
    -17 An object of sense (विषय); उपपत्त्योपलब्धेषु लोकेषु च समो भव Mb.12.288.11. (In compounds लोक is often translated by 'universally', 'generally', 'popularly'; as लोकविज्ञात so ˚विद्विष्ट).
    -Comp. -अक्षः space, sky.
    -अतिग a. extraordinary, supernatural.
    -अतिशय a. superior to the world, extraordinary.
    -अधिक a. ex- traordinary, uncommon; सर्वं पण्डितराजराजितिलकेनाकारि लोकाधिकम् Bv.4.44; Ki.2.47.
    -अधिपः 1 a king.
    -2 a god or deity.
    -अधिपतिः a lord of the world.
    -अनुग्रहः prosperity of mankind.
    -अनुरागः 'love of mankind', universal love, general benevolence, philanthropy.
    -अनुवृत्तम् obedience of the people.
    -अन्तरम् 'another world', the next world, future life; लोकान्तरसुखं पुण्यं तपोदानसमुद्भवम् R.1.69;6.45; लोकान्तरं गम्-प्राप् &c. 'to die'.
    -अन्तरित a. dead.
    -अपवादः public scandal, po- pular censure; लोकापवादो बलवान् मतो मे R.14.4.
    -अभि- भाविन् a.
    1 overcoming the world.
    -2 pervading the whole world (as light).
    -अभिलक्षित a. generally liked.
    -अभ्युदयः public weal or welfare.
    -अयनः N. of Nārāyaṇa.
    -अलोकः N. of a mythical mountain that encircles the earth and is situated beyond the sea of fresh water which surrounds the last of the seven conti- nents; beyond लोकालोक there is complete darkness, and to this side of it there is light; it thus divides the visible world from the regions of darkness; प्रकाशश्चा- प्रकाशश्च लोकालोक इवाचलः R.1.68; लोकालोकव्याहतं धर्मराशेः शालीनं वा धाम नालं प्रसर्तुम् Śi.16.83; Mv.5.1,45; ऊर्ध्व- मालोकयामासुः लोकालोकमिवोच्छ्रितम् Parṇāl.3.3; (for further explanation see Dr. Bhāṇḍārkar's note on l. 79 of Māl. 1th Act). (
    -कौ) the visible and the invisible world.
    -आकाशः 1 space, sky.
    -2 (with Jains) a worldly region.
    -आचारः common practice, popular or general custom, ways of the world; अपि शास्त्रेषु कुशला लोकाचारविवर्जिताः Pt.5.43.
    -आत्मन् m. the soul of the universe.
    -आदिः 1 the beginning of the world.
    -2 the creator of the world.
    - आयत a. atheistical, materialistic. (
    -तः) a materialist, an atheist, a follower of Chārvāka. (
    -तम्) materialism, atheism; (for some account see the first chapter of the Sarvadarśanasaṁgraha).
    -आयतिकः an atheist, a materialist; कच्चिन्न लोकायतिकान् ब्राह्मणांस्तात सेवसे Rām. 2.1.38.
    -ईशः 1 a king (lord of the world).
    -2 Brahman.
    -3 quick-silver.
    -उक्तिः f.
    1 a proverb, popular saying; लोके ख्यातिमुपागतात्र सकले लोकोक्तिरेषा यतो दग्धानां किल वह्निना हितकरः सेको$पि तस्योद्भवः Pt.1.371.
    -2 common talk, public opinion.
    -उत्तर a. extraordinary, uncommon, unusual; लोकोत्तरा च कृतिः Bv.1.69.7; U.2.7. (
    -रः) a king. ˚वादिन् m. pl. N. of a Buddhist school.
    -उपक्रोशनम् circulating evil reports among the people; असारस्य वाक्संतक्षणैर्लोकोपक्रोशनैः... अपवाहनम् Dk.2.2.
    -एकबन्धुः an epithet of Śākyamuni.
    -एषणा 1 desire for heaven; या वितैषणा सा लोकैषणोभे ह्येते एषणे एव भवतः Bṛi. Up.3.5.1.
    -2 desire for the good opinion of the public.
    -कण्टकः 1 a troublesome or wicked man, the curse of mankind.
    -2 an epithet of Rāvaṇa; see कण्टक.
    -कथा a popular legend, folk-tale.
    -कर्तृ, -कृत् m. the creator of the world.
    -कल्प a.
    1 resembling the world.
    -2 regarded by the world. (
    -ल्पः) a period or age of the world.
    -कान्त a. liked by the people, popular; भव पितुरनुरूपस्त्वं गुणैर्लोककान्तैः V.5.21. (
    -न्ता) a kind of medical herb (Mar. मुरुढशेंग).
    -कारणकारणः an epithet of Śiva.
    -क्षित् a. inhabiting heaven.
    -गतिः f. actions of men.
    -गाथा a song handed down among people, folk-song.
    -चक्षुस् n. the sun.
    -चारित्रम् the ways of the world.
    -जननी an epithet of Lakṣmī.
    -जित् m.
    1 an epithet of Buddha.
    -2 any conqueror of the world.
    -3 a sage. -a. winning heaven; तद्धैतल्लोकजिदेव Bṛi. Up.1.3.28.
    -ज्ञ a. knowing the world.
    -ज्येष्ठः an epithet of Buddha.
    -तत्त्वम् knowledge of mankind.
    -तन्त्रम् course of the world; निर्मितो लोकतन्त्रो$यं लोकेषु परिवर्तते Bhāg.12.11.29.
    -तुषारः camphor.
    -त्रयम्, -त्रयी the three worlds taken collectively; उत्खात- लोकत्रयकण्टकेपि R.14.73.
    -दम्भक a. cheating mankind; Ms.4.195.
    -द्वारम् the gate of heaven.
    -धर्मः 1 a worldly matter.
    -2 (with Buddhists) worldly condi- tion.
    -धातुः a particular division of the world (जम्बु- द्वीप).
    -धातृ m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -धारिणी N. of the earth.
    -नाथः 1 Brahman.
    -2 Viṣṇu.
    -3 Śiva.
    -4 a king, sovereign.
    -5 a Buddha
    -6 the sun.
    -नेतृ m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -पः, -पालः 1 a regent or guardian of a quarter of the world; ललिताभिनयं तमद्य भर्ता मरुतां द्रष्टुमनाः सलोकपालः V.2.18; R.2.75;12.89;17.78; (the lokapālas are eight; see अष्टदिक्पाल).
    -2 a king, sovereign.
    -पक्तिः f. esteem of mankind, general respectability.
    -पतिः 1 an epi- thet of Brahman.
    -2 of Viṣṇu.
    -3 a king, sovereign.
    -पथः, -पद्धतिः f. the general or usual way, the univer- sally accepted way.
    -परोक्ष a. hidden from the world.
    -पितामहः an epithet of Brahman.
    -प्रकाशनः the sun.
    -प्रत्ययः universal prevalence.
    -प्रवादः general rumour, current report, popular talk.
    -प्रसिद्ध a. well-known, universally known.
    -बन्धुः, -बान्धवः 1 the sun.
    -2 Śiva.
    -बाह्य, -वाह्य 1 excluded from society, excom- municated.
    -2 differing from the world, eccentric, singular; उन्मादवन्नृत्यति लोकबाह्यः Bhāg.11.2.4. (
    -ह्यः) an outcast.
    -भर्तृ a. supporter of the people.
    -भावन, -भाविन् a. promoting the welfare of the world.
    -मर्यादा an established or current custom.
    -मातृ f. an epithet of Lakṣmī.
    -मार्गः an established custom.
    -यज्ञः desire for the good opinion of the people (लोकैषणा); Mb.1. 18.5. (com. लोकयज्ञो लोकैषणा सर्वो मां साधुमेव जानात्विति वासनारूपः).
    -यात्रा 1 worldly affairs, the course of world- ly life, business of the world; तस्माल्लोकयात्रार्थी नित्यमुद्यत- दण्डः स्यात् Kau. A.1.4; Mb.3.15.31; Dk.2.8; एवं किलेयं लोकयात्रा Mv.7; यावदयं संसारस्तावत् प्रसिद्धैवेयं लोकयात्रा Ve.3.
    -2 a popular usage or custom; एषोदिता लोकयात्रा नित्यं स्त्रीपुंसयोः शुभा Ms.9.25
    -3 worldly existence, career in life; Māl.4,6.
    -4 support of life, maintenance.
    -रक्षः a king, sovereign.
    -रञ्जनम् pleasing the world, popularity.
    -रवः popular talk or report.
    -रावण a. tormentor of the people; रावणं लोकरावणम् Rām.3.33.1; Mb.3.148.12.
    -लेखः 1 a public document.
    -2 an ordi- nary letter.
    -लोचनम् the sun.
    -वचनम् a popular rumour or report.
    -वर्तनम् the means by which the world subsists.
    -वादः public rumour; common talk, popular report; मां लोकवादश्रवणादहासीः R.14.61.
    -वार्ता popular report, public rumour; कश्चिदक्षर्धूतः कलासु कवित्वेषु लोकवार्तासु चातिवैचक्षण्यान्मया समसृज्यत Dk.2.2.
    -विद्विष्ट a. disliked by men, generally or universally disliked.
    -विधिः 1 a mode of proceeding prevalent in the world.
    -2 the creator of the world.
    -विनायकाः a class of deities presiding over diseases.
    -विभ्रमः see लोकव्यवहार; हृष्यत्तनुर्विस्मृतलोकविभ्रमः Bhāg.1.71.26.
    -विरुद्ध a. op- posed to public opinion; यद्यपि शुद्धं लोकविरुद्धं नाकरणीयम् नाचरणीयम्.
    -विश्रुत a. farfamed, universally known, famous, renowned.
    -विश्रुतिः f.
    1 world-wide fame.
    -2 unfounded rumour, mere report.
    -विसर्गः 1 the end of the world; Mb.
    -2 the creation of the world; Bhāg.
    -वृत्तम् 1 the way of the world, a custom prevalent in the world; लोकवृत्तमनुष्ठेयं कृतं वो बाष्पमोक्षणम् Rām.4.25.3.
    -2 an idle talk or gossip; न लोकवृत्तं वर्तेत वृत्तिहेतोः कथंचन Ms.4.11.
    -वृत्तान्तः, -व्यवहारः 1 the course or ways of the world, general custom; Ś.5.
    -2 course of events.
    -व्यवहार a. commonly used, universally current.
    -व्रतम् general practice or way of the world.
    -श्रुतिः f.
    1 a popular report.
    -2 world-wide fame.
    -संसृतिः f.
    1 fate, destiny.
    -2 course through the world.
    -संकरः general confusion in the world.
    -संग्रहः 1 the whole universe.
    -2 the welfare of the world; लोकसंग्रहमेवापि संपश्यन् कर्तुमर्हसि Bg.3.2.
    -3 worldly experience.
    -4 propitiation of mankind.
    -संपन्न a. possessed of worldly wisdom.
    -संबाधः a throng of men, going and coming; इतस्ततः प्रवेशनिर्गमप्रवृत्तलोकसंबाधम् Dk.2.3.
    -साक्षिक a.
    1 having the world as a witness; in the face of the world; प्रत्यक्षं फलमश्नन्ति कर्मणां लोकसाक्षिकम् Mb.3.32.6.
    -2 attested by witnesses.
    -साक्षिन् m.
    1 an epithet of Brahman.
    -2 fire.
    -साधक a. creating worlds.
    -साधारण a. common (as a topic); Dk.
    -सिद्ध a.
    1 cur- rent among the people, usual, customary.
    -2 generally received or accepted.
    -सीमातिवर्तिन् a. extraordinary, supernatural.
    -सुन्दर a. generally admired.
    -स्थलम् common occurrence.
    -स्थितिः f.
    1 existence or conduct of the universe, worldly existence; the stability or perma- nence of the world; ये चैवं पुरुषाः कलासु कुशलास्तेष्वेव लोकस्थितिः Bh.2.22.
    -2 a universal law.
    -हास्य a. world-derided, the butt of general ridicule.
    -हित a. beneficial to mankind or to the world. (
    -तम्) general welfare.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > लोकः _lōkḥ

  • 15 témoignage

    témoignage [temwaɲaʒ]
    masculine noun
       b. ( = récit, rapport) account
       c. ( = signe) témoignage de reconnaissance ( = geste) gesture of gratitude ; ( = cadeau) token of gratitude
    * * *
    temwaɲaʒ
    nom masculin
    1) ( histoire personnelle) story; ( compte rendu) account
    2) ( au cours d'une enquête) evidence [U]; ( déposition) evidence [U], testimony
    3) ( marque) fml

    témoignage d'amitié — ( cadeau) token of friendship; ( geste) expression of friendship

    * * *
    temwaɲaʒ nm
    1) DROIT testimony no pl evidence no pl
    2) (= rapport, récit) account
    3) (= cadeau) [affection, reconnaissance] token, mark, (= preuve) expression
    * * *
    1 ( histoire personnelle) story; ( compte rendu) account; le témoignage d'une ancienne droguée a former drug addict's story; recueillir les témoignages des réfugiés to get the refugees' stories; les témoignages recueillis auprès de the accounts given by; apporter son témoignage to give one's own account; selon les témoignages de according to (accounts given by); rendre témoignage sans prendre position to give an objective account (of things); un livre exceptionnel, témoignage sur une époque fig an exceptional book, a first-hand account of an era;
    2 ( au cours d'une enquête) evidence ¢; Jur ( déposition) evidence ¢, testimony; des témoignages contradictoires/qui concordent conflicting/corroborating evidence; obtenir le témoignage de qn to get evidence from sb ou sb's evidence ; s'appuyer sur les témoignages des voisins to rely on evidence from the neighboursGB; selon plusieurs témoignages according to several witnesses; entendre le témoignage de qn to hear sb's evidence ou testimony; rendre témoignage to give evidence, to testify; porter témoignage (de qch) to bear witness (to sth); ⇒ faux;
    3 fml ( marque) témoignage d'amitié ( cadeau) token ou mark of friendship; ( geste) expression ou gesture of friendship; les témoignages de sympathie expressions of sympathy; en témoignage de ma reconnaissance as a mark ou token of my gratitude; donner des témoignages de son amitié to prove one's friendship; rendre témoignage au courage de qn to testify to sb's courage.
    [temwaɲaʒ] nom masculin
    1. DROIT [action de témoigner] testimony, evidence
    faux témoignage perjury, false evidence, false witness
    rendre témoignage à quelque chose [rendre hommage] to pay tribute to ou to hail (soutenu) ou to salute something
    2. [contenu des déclarations] deposition, (piece of) evidence
    3. [preuve] gesture, expression, token
    a. [après un deuil] to receive messages of sympathy
    b. [pendant une épreuve] to receive messages of support
    4. [récit - d'un participant, d'un observateur] (eyewitness) account
    cette pièce sera un jour considérée comme un témoignage sur la vie des années 80 this play will one day be considered as an authentic account of life in the 80s

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > témoignage

  • 16 corresponder

    v.
    1 to correspond.
    Estos dos objetos corresponden These two objects correspond.
    2 to be right or fitting (ser adecuado).
    voy a darle las gracias como corresponde I'm going to thank him, as is only right
    3 to repay (sentimiento).
    ella no le correspondía she didn't feel the same way about him
    amor no correspondido unrequited love
    4 to be supposed to, to have to, to correspond to oneself to, to have the obligation to.
    Me corresponde hacer mi tarea I am supposed to do my homework.
    Nos corresponde It corresponds to ourselves.
    5 to reciprocate, to give back.
    Con esto, correspondo su favor With this, I reciprocate his=her favor.
    6 to concern, to correspond to.
    Me corresponde este asunto This issue concerns me.
    * * *
    1 (ser adecuado) to become, befit; (color, aspecto) to match, go with
    2 (encajar) to correspond (a, to), tally (a, with); (descripción) to fit
    3 (pertenecer) to belong, pertain
    1 (ser el turno) to be one's turn
    3 (incumbir) to be the job of, be the responsibility of
    4 (devolver) to return; (amabilidad) to repay
    1 (ajustarse) to correspond; (cifras) to tally
    2 (armonizar) to be in harmony, go with
    3 (cartearse) to correspond
    4 (amarse) to love each other
    * * *
    verb
    * * *
    1. VI
    1) (=tocar)
    a) [en reparto]
    b) [como derecho]

    este hecho no ocupa el lugar que le corresponde en la historia de España — this event does not occupy the place it should in Spanish history, this event is not accorded the importance it deserves in Spanish history

    c) [en sorteo, competición] [honor, victoria] to go to

    la victoria final correspondió a Escartín — the final victory was Escartín's, the final victory went to Escartín

    al primer premio le correspondieron 30.000 euros — the winner of the first prize received 30,000 euros

    2) (=incumbir)

    corresponder a algn[responsabilidad] to fall to sb

    esta decisión le corresponde al director — this decision is for the director (to take), this decision falls to the director

    a mí no me corresponde criticarlo — it is not for me to criticize him, it is not my place to criticize him

    "a quien corresponda" — "to whom it may concern"

    3) (=deberse)

    corresponder a algo: de los 50 millones de ganancias, 40 corresponden a ventas en el extranjero — out of profits of 50 million, 40 million comes from overseas sales o overseas sales account for 40 million

    la mayor parte de nuestra deuda corresponde a préstamos norteamericanos — most of our debt is a result of American loans, American loans account for most of our debt

    4) frm (=ser adecuado)

    corresponder a: se vistió como correspondía a la ocasión — she dressed suitably for the occasion

    fue recibido como corresponde a una persona de su cargo — he was received in a manner befitting a person of his rank, he was received as befitted a person of his rank

    5) (=concordar)

    corresponder a o con — to match with, match up with

    el presunto delincuente, cuyas iniciales corresponden a las siglas R.C.A. — the alleged perpetrator of the crime, whose initials are R.C.A.

    6) (=retribuir)

    corresponder a[+ cariño, amor] to return; [+ favor, generosidad] to repay, return

    ella lo amaba, pero él no le correspondía — she loved him but he did not return her love o love her back o love her in return

    pero ella le correspondió con desprecio — but she responded with contempt, but all she gave in return was contempt

    7) (Mat) to correspond
    8) (Ferro)
    2.
    See:
    * * *
    1.
    verbo intransitivo
    1)
    a) ( en un reparto) (+ me/te/le etc)
    b) ( incumbir)

    a quien corresponda — (Corresp) to whom it may concern

    c) (en 3a pers) ( ser adecuado)

    te disculpas, como corresponde — apologize, you know you should o (frml) as is right and proper

    2) (encajar, cuadrar)

    corresponder a algo: su aspecto correspondía a la descripción his appearance fitted o matched the description; la leyenda no corresponde a la fotografía — the caption doesn't belong with o match this photograph

    3) (a favor, atención)

    corresponder a algo: quisiera corresponder a su generosidad I'd like to repay them for their generosity; (+ me/te/le etc) lo quiere, pero él no le corresponde she loves him, but he doesn't feel the same way about her; y tú le correspondes con esta grosería — and you repay him with this kind of rudeness

    2.
    corresponder vt < favor> to return; < atención> to return, repay
    3.

    corresponderse con algo<con los hechos/con la declaración> to square o tally with something

    * * *
    = fit, behoove [behove, -USA], return + Posesivo + affection, requite.
    Ex. Especially if the new subject is one which upsets the previous structure of relationships, it will be difficult to fit into the existing order.
    Ex. With the vendors ready to listen it behoves the information profession to work out what it wants.
    Ex. The film centers on a non-white secretary who believes that her dusky skin and non-Nordic features prevent her boss from returning her affections.
    Ex. The sultan requited the king of China's present by sending him ten swords with scabbards encrusted in pearls.
    ----
    * como corresponde a = as befits.
    * corresponder a = be incumbent on/upon, fall to.
    * corresponder a + Nombre = be up to + Nombre.
    * corresponderse = match, bear + correspondence (to).
    * corresponderse a = befit.
    * corresponderse (a/con) = correspond (to/with).
    * corresponderse con = go with, go + hand in hand (with), go + hand in glove with.
    * el lugar que le corresponde a = the due place of.
    * hacer lo que le corresponde a Uno = do + Posesivo + part.
    * lo que le corresponde = fair share.
    * lugar que le corresponde = Posesivo + rightful place.
    * lugar que nos corresponde = place in the sun.
    * responsabilidad + corresponder a = responsibility + fall to.
    * según corresponda = as appropriate.
    * si corresponde = if applicable.
    * * *
    1.
    verbo intransitivo
    1)
    a) ( en un reparto) (+ me/te/le etc)
    b) ( incumbir)

    a quien corresponda — (Corresp) to whom it may concern

    c) (en 3a pers) ( ser adecuado)

    te disculpas, como corresponde — apologize, you know you should o (frml) as is right and proper

    2) (encajar, cuadrar)

    corresponder a algo: su aspecto correspondía a la descripción his appearance fitted o matched the description; la leyenda no corresponde a la fotografía — the caption doesn't belong with o match this photograph

    3) (a favor, atención)

    corresponder a algo: quisiera corresponder a su generosidad I'd like to repay them for their generosity; (+ me/te/le etc) lo quiere, pero él no le corresponde she loves him, but he doesn't feel the same way about her; y tú le correspondes con esta grosería — and you repay him with this kind of rudeness

    2.
    corresponder vt < favor> to return; < atención> to return, repay
    3.

    corresponderse con algo<con los hechos/con la declaración> to square o tally with something

    * * *
    = fit, behoove [behove, -USA], return + Posesivo + affection, requite.

    Ex: Especially if the new subject is one which upsets the previous structure of relationships, it will be difficult to fit into the existing order.

    Ex: With the vendors ready to listen it behoves the information profession to work out what it wants.
    Ex: The film centers on a non-white secretary who believes that her dusky skin and non-Nordic features prevent her boss from returning her affections.
    Ex: The sultan requited the king of China's present by sending him ten swords with scabbards encrusted in pearls.
    * como corresponde a = as befits.
    * corresponder a = be incumbent on/upon, fall to.
    * corresponder a + Nombre = be up to + Nombre.
    * corresponderse = match, bear + correspondence (to).
    * corresponderse a = befit.
    * corresponderse (a/con) = correspond (to/with).
    * corresponderse con = go with, go + hand in hand (with), go + hand in glove with.
    * el lugar que le corresponde a = the due place of.
    * hacer lo que le corresponde a Uno = do + Posesivo + part.
    * lo que le corresponde = fair share.
    * lugar que le corresponde = Posesivo + rightful place.
    * lugar que nos corresponde = place in the sun.
    * responsabilidad + corresponder a = responsibility + fall to.
    * según corresponda = as appropriate.
    * si corresponde = if applicable.

    * * *
    vi
    A
    1 (en un reparto) (+ me/te/le etc):
    a él le corresponde la mitad de la herencia half the inheritance goes to him
    ésta es la parte que te corresponde this is your part o share
    2
    (incumbir): te corresponde a ti preparar el informe it's your job to prepare the report
    no me corresponde a mí decírselo it's not my job o it's not for me to tell him
    el lugar que le corresponde his rightful place
    a quien corresponda ( Corresp) to whom it may concern
    fue recibido con los honores que corresponden a su rango he was received with the honors befitting his rank
    (ser adecuado): si no puedes ir, lo que corresponde es que le avises if you can't go you should let him know
    ahora vas y te disculpas, como corresponde now go and apologize, you know you should o ( frml) as is right and proper
    serán juzgados como corresponde they will be tried according to the due process of the law
    ponlos en el cajón o archívalos, según corresponda put them in the drawer or file them, as appropriate
    B
    (cuadrar, encajar): esto aquí no corresponde this doesn't belong o fit o go here
    corresponder A/ CON algo:
    su aspecto correspondía a la descripción que me habían dado his appearance fitted o matched the description I had been given
    su versión no corresponde con la de los demás testigos his version does not square with o tally with o match that of the other witnesses
    la leyenda no corresponde a la fotografía the caption doesn't belong with o match this photograph
    C (a un favor, una atención) corresponder A algo:
    quisiera corresponder a su generosidad I'd like to repay them for their generosity, I'd like to return o repay their generosity
    (+ me/te/le etc): lo quiere, pero él no le corresponde she loves him, but he doesn't return her love o feel the same way about her
    la ama y ella le corresponde con desprecio he loves her but she responds with contempt
    y tú le correspondes con esta grosería and you repay him with this kind of rudeness
    ■ corresponder
    vt
    ‹favor› to return; ‹atención› to return, repay
    la historia de un amor no correspondido a story of unrequited love
    corresponderse CON algo:
    su versión no se corresponde con los hechos reales her version doesn't square o tally with the facts
    eso no se corresponde para nada con su manera de ser that's totally out of keeping with her character
    * * *

     

    corresponder ( conjugate corresponder) verbo intransitivo
    1


    la parte que te corresponde your part o share
    b) ( incumbir):


    el lugar que le corresponde his rightful place
    c) (en 3a pers) ( ser adecuado):

    debe disculparse, como corresponde he must apologize, as is right and proper (frml);

    según corresponda as appropriate
    2 (encajar, cuadrar):
    su aspecto corresponde a la descripción his appearance fits o matches the description;

    el texto no corresponde a la foto the text doesn't belong with o match the photograph
    3 corresponder a algo ‹ a un favor to return sth;
    a amabilidad/generosidad to repay sth
    verbo transitivo ‹favor/atención to return;

    corresponder verbo intransitivo
    1 (pertenecer) to belong: sólo pido lo que me corresponde, I only want my share
    2 (ser adecuado) to correspond [a, to] [ con, with]
    3 (incumbir) to concern, be incumbent upon: esa tarea le corresponde, that's his job

    ' corresponder' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    concernir
    - tocar
    - devolver
    - encajar
    - responder
    English:
    belong
    - correspond
    - reciprocate
    - return
    - up to
    - match
    - repay
    * * *
    vi
    1. [compensar]
    corresponder (con algo) a algo/alguien to repay sth/sb (with sth);
    ella nunca correspondió a mi amor she never returned my love, she never felt the same way about me;
    amor no correspondido unrequited love
    2. [tocar]
    les corresponden 5 millones a cada uno they get o they're due 5 million each;
    a mí me correspondió encargarme de la comida it was my job to take care of o organize the food
    3. [coincidir, encajar] to correspond (a/con to/with);
    esta historia no corresponde con la realidad this story doesn't tally o agree with the facts
    4. [competer]
    corresponderle a alguien hacer algo to be sb's responsibility to do sth;
    no me corresponde a mí enjuiciar su trabajo it's not my place to judge his work
    5. [ser adecuado] to be right o fitting;
    voy a darle las gracias como corresponde I'm going to thank him, as is only right;
    estuvo genial, tal y como corresponde a un cantante de su talla she was brilliant, just as you would expect from a singer of her stature
    vt
    [sentimiento] to repay;
    ella no le correspondía she didn't feel the same way about him
    * * *
    v/i
    1
    :
    corresponder a alguien de bienes be for s.o., be due to s.o.; de responsabilidad be up to s.o.; de asunto concern s.o.; a un favor repay s.o. ( con with)
    2
    :
    actuar como corresponde do the right thing
    * * *
    1) : to correspond
    2) : to pertain, to belong
    3) : to be appropriate, to fit
    4) : to reciprocate
    * * *
    1. (tocar) to be
    2. (responsibilidad, obligación) to be your job / to be up to
    eso te corresponde a ti that's your job / that's up to you

    Spanish-English dictionary > corresponder

  • 17 διά

    διά prep. w. gen. and acc. (Hom.+) (for lit. s. ἀνά, beg.); the fundamental idea that finds expression in this prep. is separation, esp. in the gen., with the gener. sense ‘through’; in the acc. the gener. sense also is ‘through’ (cp. the semantic range in Eng.), but primarily with a causal focus ‘owing to’.
    A. w. gen.
    marker of extension through an area or object, via, through
    w. verbs of going διέρχεσθαι διὰ πάντων (sc. τόπων, EpArist 132) go through all the places Ac 9:32; cp. Mt 12:43; Lk 11:24. ἀπελεύσομαι διʼ ὑμῶν εἰς I will go through your city on the way to Ro 15:28; cp. 2 Cor. 1:16. διαβαίνειν Hb 11:29. διαπορεύεσθαι διὰ σπορίμων Lk 6:1. εἰσέρχεσθαι διὰ τῆς πύλης (Jos., Ant. 13, 229) Mt 7:13a; τ. θύρας J 10:1f; cp. vs. 9. παρέρχεσθαι διὰ τ. ὁδοῦ pass by along the road Mt 8:28; cp. 7:13b. παραπορεύεσθαι Mk 2:23; 9:30. περιπατεῖν διὰ τοῦ φωτός walk about through or in the light Rv 21:24. ὑποστρέφειν διὰ Μακεδονίας return through M. Ac 20:3.—Ἰης. ὁ ἐλθὼν διʼ ὕδατος καὶ αἵματος 1J 5:6 first of all refers quite literally to Jesus’ passing through water at the hand of John and through blood at his death (on the expression ‘come through blood’ in this sense cp. Eur., Phoen. 20 in Alex. Aphr., Fat. 31 II 2 p. 202, 10, of the oracle to Laius the father of Oedipus, concerning the bloody downfall of his house: πᾶς σὸς οἶκος βήσεται διʼ αἵματος). But mng. 3c may also apply: Jesus comes with the water of baptism and with the blood of redemption for his own.—AKlöpper, 1J 5:6–12: ZWT 43, 1900, 378–400.—The ῥῆμα ἐκπορευόμενον διὰ στόματος θεοῦ Mt 4:4 (Dt 8:3) is simply the word that proceeds out of the mouth of God (cp. Theognis 1, 18 Diehl3 τοῦτʼ ἔπος ἀθανάτων ἦλθε διὰ στομάτων; Pittacus in Diog. L. 1, 78 διὰ στόματος λαλεῖ; Chrysippus argues in Diog. L. 7, 187: εἴ τι λαλεῖς, τοῦτο διὰ τοῦ στόματός σου διέρχεται, i.e. if one e.g. says the word ἅμαξα, a wagon passes through the person’s lips; TestIss 7:4 ψεῦδος οὐκ ἀνῆλθε διὰ τ. χειλέων μου. Cp. also δέχεσθαι διὰ τῶν χειρῶν τινος Gen 33:10 beside δέχ. ἐκ τ. χειρ. τινος Ex 32:4).
    w. other verbs that include motion: οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος διὰ πασῶν τ. ἐκκλησιῶν (sc. ἀγγέλλεται) throughout all the congregations 2 Cor 8:18. διαφέρεσθαι διʼ (v.l. καθʼ) ὅλης τῆς χώρας be spread through the whole region Ac 13:49. διὰ τ. κεράμων καθῆκαν αὐτόν they let him down through the tile roof Lk 5:19. διὰ τοῦ τείχους καθῆκαν through an opening in the wall (Jos., Ant. 5, 15) Ac 9:25; cp. 2 Cor 11:33. (σωθήσεται) ὡς διὰ πυρός as if he had come through fire 1 Cor 3:15. διασῴζεσθαι διʼ ὕδατος be brought safely through the water 1 Pt 3:20.—διʼ ὅλου J 19:23 s. ὅλος 2.
    of a whole period of time, to its very end throughout, through, during διὰ παντός (sc. χρόνου. Edd. gener. write διὰ παντός, but Tdf. writes διαπαντός exc. Mt 18:10) always, continually, constantly (Hdt. 1, 122, 3; Thu. 1, 38, 1; Vett. Val. 220, 1; 16; PLond I, 42, 6 [172 B.C.] p. 30; BGU 1078, 2; PGM 7, 235; LXX; GrBar 10:7; EpArist index; Jos., Ant. 3, 281; SibOr Fgm. 1, 17; Just., D. 6, 2; 12, 3 al.) Mt 18:10; Mk 5:5; Lk 24:53; Ac 2:25 (Ps 15:8); 10:2; 24:16; Ro 11:10 (Ps 68:24); 2 Th 3:16; Hb 9:6; 13:15; Hm 5, 2, 3; Hs 9, 27, 3. διὰ νυκτός during the night, overnight (νύξ 1b) Ac 23:31. διʼ ὅλης νυκτός the whole night through Lk 5:5; J 21:6 v.l. (X., An. 4, 2, 4; Diod S 3, 12, 3 διʼ ὅλης τῆς νυκτός; PGM 4, 3151; Jos., Ant. 6, 37; cp. διʼ ἡμέρας all through the day: IPriene 112, 61 and 99; 1 Macc 12:27; 4 Macc 3:7). διʼ ἡμερῶν τεσσεράκοντα Ac 1:3 means either for forty days (Philo, Vi. Cont. 35 διʼ ἓξ ἡμερῶν. So AFridrichsen, ThBl 6, 1927, 337–41; MEnslin, JBL 47, 1928, 60–73) or (s. b below) now and then in the course of 40 days (B-D-F §223, 1; Rob. 581; WMichaelis, ThBl 4, 1925, 102f; Bruce, Acts). διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν throughout the lifetime Hb 2:15 (cp. διὰ παντὸς τοῦ βίου: X., Mem. 1, 2, 61; Pla., Phileb. 39e; Dionys. Hal. 2, 21; διʼ ὅλου τοῦ ζῆν EpArist 130; 141; 168).
    of a period of time within which someth. occurs during, at (PTebt 48, 10) διὰ (τῆς) νυκτός at night, during the night (Palaeph. 1, 10; PRyl 138, 15 κατέλαβα τοῦτον διὰ νυκτός; Jos., Bell. 1, 229. S. νύξ 1b end) Ac 5:19; 16:9; 17:10. διὰ τῆς ἡμέρας during the day Lk 9:37 D (Antig. Car. 128 διὰ πέμπτης ἡμέρας=on the fifth day). διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν within three days Mt 26:61; Mk 14:58.
    of an interval of time, after (Hdt. 6, 118, 3 διʼ ἐτέων εἴκοσι; Thu. 2, 94, 3; X., Mem. 2, 8, 1; Diod S 5, 28, 6 of transmigration of souls: διʼ ἐτῶν ὡρισμένων [=after the passing of a certain number of years] πάλιν βιοῦν; OGI 56, 38; 4 Macc 13:21; Jos., Ant. 4, 209): διʼ ἐτῶν πλειόνων after several years Ac 24:17. διὰ δεκατεσσάρων (s. under δέκα) ἐτῶν after 14 years Gal 2:1. διʼ ἡμερῶν several days afterward Mk 2:1. διὰ ἱκανοῦ χρόνου after (quite) some time Ac 11:2 D (X., Cyr. 1, 4, 28 διὰ χρόνου).
    marker of instrumentality or circumstance whereby someth. is accomplished or effected, by, via, through
    of means or instrument γράφειν διά χάρτου καὶ μέλανος write w. paper and ink 2J 12; cp. 3J 13 (Plut., Sol. 87 [17, 3]). διὰ πυρὸς δοκιμάζειν test by fire 1 Pt 1:7. διὰ χρημάτων κτᾶσθαι Ac 8:20. Hebraistically in expr. denoting activity διὰ χειρῶν τινος (LXX) Mk 6:2; Ac 5:12; 14:3; 19:11, 26. Differently γράφειν διὰ χειρός τινος write through the agency of someone 15:23; cp. 11:30. εἰπεῖν διὰ στόματός τινος by the mouth of someone (where the usage discussed in A1a is influential) 1:16; 3:18, 21; 4:25. εὔσημον λόγον διδόναι διὰ τῆς γλώσσης utter intelligible speech with the tongue 1 Cor 14:9. διὰ τοῦ νοὸς λαλεῖν speak, using one’s reason (=consciously; opp., ecstatic speech) vs. 19 v.l. Of the work of Christ: περιποιεῖσθαι διὰ τοῦ αἵματος obtain through his blood Ac 20:28; cp. Eph 1:7; Col 1:20. Also διὰ τοῦ θανάτου Ro 5:10; Col 1:22; Hb 2:14; διὰ τοῦ σώματος Ro 7:4; διὰ τῆς ἰδίας σαρκός AcPlCor 2:6; cp. 2:15; διὰ τοῦ σταυροῦ Eph 2:16; διὰ τῆς θυσίας Hb 9:26; διὰ τῆς προσφορᾶς τοῦ σώματος Ἰησοῦ through the offering of the body of Jesus 10:10; διὰ παθημάτων 2:10.
    of manner, esp. w. verbs of saying: ἀπαγγέλλειν διὰ λόγου by word of mouth Ac 15:27; cp. 2 Th 2:15. διʼ ἐπιστολῶν by letter (POxy 1066, 9; 1070, 14f πολλάκις σοι γράψας διὰ ἐπιστολῶν πολλῶν; Tat. 12:3 δια γραφῆς in writing) 1 Cor 16:3; 2 Cor 10:11; cp. 2 Th 2:2, 15. διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ w. many words Ac 15:32. διʼ ὁράματος εἰπεῖν in a vision 18:9. διὰ παραβολῆς in an illustrative way, in a parable Lk 8:4. διὰ προσευχῆς καὶ δεήσεως προσεύχεσθαι call on (God) w. prayer and supplication Eph 6:18. διὰ βραχέων ἐπιστέλλειν write briefly Hb 13:22 (cp. 1 Pt 5:12 P72; Isocr. 14, 3; Lucian, Tox. 56; EpArist 128; Ath. 17:1 σκέψασθε … διὰ βρ.). Also διʼ ὀλίγων γράφειν 1 Pt 5:12 (Pla., Phileb. 31d; UPZ 42, 9 [162 B.C.]; 2 Macc 6:17).
    of attendant or prevailing circumstance (Kühner-G. I 482f; X., Cyr. 4, 6, 6 διὰ πένθους τὸ γῆρας διάγων; Just., D. 105, 2 διʼ οὗ πάθους ἔμελλενἀποθνῄσκειν; PTebt 35, 9 [111 B.C.] διὰ τῆς γνώμης τινός=with someone’s consent; Jos., Bell. 4, 105) σὲ τὸν διὰ γράμματος καὶ περιτομῆς παραβάτην νόμου you who, (though provided) with the written code and circumcision, are a transgressor/violator of the law Ro 2:27. διʼ ὑπομονῆς 8:25. διὰ προσκόμματος eat with offense (to the scruples of another) 14:20. διʼ ἀκροβυστίας in a state of being uncircumcised 4:11. διὰ πολλῶν δακρύων with many tears 2 Cor 2:4. Cp. 6:7. διὰ τῆς ἐπιγνώσεως 2 Pt 1:3 ( through recognition [of God as source of the gifts], s. Danker, Benefactor 457). διὰ πυρός in fiery form AcPlCor 2:13.—Here prob. belongs σωθήσεται διὰ τῆς τεκνογονίας 1 Ti 2:15 (opp. of the negative theme in Gen. 3:16), but s. d next. On 1J 5:6 s. A1a above.
    of efficient cause via, through διὰ νόμου ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας ( only) recognition of sin comes via the law Ro 3:20; cp. 4:13. τὰ παθήματα τὰ διὰ τοῦ νόμου passions aroused via the law 7:5. διὰ νόμου πίστεως by the law of faith 3:27; Gal 2:19. ἀφορμὴν λαμβάνειν διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς Ro 7:8, 11; cp. 13. διὰ τ. εὐαγγελίου ὑμᾶς ἐγέννησα (spiritual parenthood) 1 Cor 4:15. Perh. 1 Ti 2:15 but s. c, above. διὰ τῆς σοφίας with its wisdom 1 Cor 1:21; opp. διὰ τῆς μωρίας τοῦ κηρύγματος through the folly of proclamation = foolish proclamation ibid. διὰ τῆς Λευιτικῆς ἱερωσύνης Hb 7:11. Freq. διὰ (τῆς) πίστεως Ro 1:12; 3:22, 25, 30f; Gal 2:16; 3:14, 26; Eph 2:8; 3:12, 17 al. Cp. AcPl Cor 2:8. πίστις διʼ ἀγάπης ἐνεργουμένη faith which works through (=expresses itself in) deeds of love Gal 5:6. διὰ θελήματος θεοῦ if God is willing Ro 15:32; by the will of God 1 Cor 1:1; 2 Cor 1:1; 8:5; Eph 1:1; Col 1:1; 2 Ti 1:1.
    of occasion διὰ τῆς χάριτος by virtue of the grace Ro 12:3; Gal 1:15 (Just., D. 100, 2).—3:18; 4:23; Phlm 22. διὰ δόξης καὶ ἀρετῆς in consequence of his glory and excellence 2 Pt 1:3 v.l.
    in wording of urgent requests διὰ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν τοῦ θεοῦ by the mercy of God Ro 12:1; cp. 15:30; 1 Cor 1:10; 2 Cor 10:1.
    marker of pers. agency, through, by
    with focus on agency through ( the agency of), by (X., An. 2, 3, 17 διʼ ἑρμηνέως λέγειν; Menand., Fgm. 210, 1 οὐθεὶς διʼ ἀνθρώπου θεὸς σῴζει … ἑτέρου τόν ἕτερον; Achilles Tat. 7, 1, 3 διʼ ἐκείνου μαθεῖν; Just., D. 75, 4 διὰ παρθένου γεννηθῆναι; PMert 5, 8 γεομετρηθῆναι διʼ αὐτοῦ) ῥηθὲν διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Mt 1:22; 2:15, 23; 4:14 al. (cp. Just., A I, 47, 5 διὰ Ἠσαίου τοῦ πρ.). γεγραμμένα διὰ τῶν προφητῶν Lk 18:31; cp. Ac 2:22; 10:36; 15:12 al. διʼ ἀνθρώπου by human agency Gal 1:1. διὰ Μωϋσέως through Moses (Jos., Ant. 7, 338; Mel., P. 11, 77 διὰ χειρὸς Μωυσέως) J 1:17; under Moses’ leadership Hb 3:16. διʼ ἀγγέλων by means of divine messengers (TestJob 18:5 διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου; cp. Jos., Ant. 15, 136, but s. n. by RMarcus, Loeb ed., ad loc.) Gal 3:19; Hb 2:2. πέμψας διὰ τ. μαθητῶν εἶπεν sent and said through his disciples Mt 11:2f. Cp. the short ending of Mk. γράφειν διά τινος of the bearer IRo 10:1; IPhld 11:2; ISm 12:1, but also of pers. who had a greater or smaller part in drawing up some document (Dionys. of Cor. in Eus., HE 4, 23, 11) 1 Pt 5:12 (on the practice s. ERichards, The Secretary in the Letters of Paul ’91). In this case διά comes close to the mng. represented by (LWenger, D. Stellvertretung im Rechte d. Pap. 1906, 9ff; Dssm., LO 98 [LAE 123f]). So also κρίνει ὁ θεὸς διὰ Χρ. Ἰ. God judges, represented by Christ Jesus Ro 2:16. Christ as intermediary in the creation of the world J 1:3, 10; 1 Cor 8:6; Col 1:16.—εὐχαριστεῖν τ. θεῷ διὰ Ἰ. Χρ. thank God through Jesus Christ Ro 1:8; 7:25; Col 3:17.—Occasionally the mediation becomes actual presence (references for this usage in BKeil, Anonymus Argentinensis 1902, p. 192, 1; 306 note) διὰ πολλῶν μαρτύρων in the presence of many witnesses 2 Ti 2:2 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 114, 31 διὰ θεοῦ μέσου=in the presence of God as mediator; Philo, Leg. ad Gai. 187 τὸ διὰ μαρτύρων κλαίειν=weeping in the presence of witnesses).
    with focus on the originator of an action (Hom. et al.; pap, LXX, EpArist)
    α. of human activity (PSI 354, 6 [254 B.C.] τὸν χόρτον τὸν συνηγμένον διʼ ἡμῶν=by us; 500, 5; 527, 12; 1 Esdr 6:13; 2 Macc 6:21; 4 Macc 1:11) 2 Cor 1:11 (where διὰ πολλῶν resumes ἐκ πολλῶν προσώπων). ᾧ παρέλαβε κανόνι διὰ τῶν μακαρίων προφήτων καὶ τοῦ ἁγίου εὐαγγελίου AcPlCor 2:36.
    β. of divine activity:—of God (Aeschyl., Ag. 1485; Pla., Symp. 186e ἡ ἰατρικὴ πᾶσα διὰ τ. θεοῦ τούτου [Asclepius] κυβερνᾶται; Ael. Aristid., Sarap. [Or. 8 Dind.=45 Keil] 14 K. πάντα γὰρ πανταχοῦ διὰ σοῦ τε καὶ διὰ σὲ ἡμῖν γίγνεται; Zosimus in CALG p. 143 and a magic ring in introd. 133; EpArist 313) 1 Cor 1:9 διʼ οὗ ἐκλήθητε (v.l. ὑπό s. καλέω 4); Ro 11:36 (s. Norden, Agn. Th. 240–50; 347f); Hb 2:10b (s. B 2a, below; cp. Ar. 1:5 διʼ αὐτοῦ … τὰ πάντα συνέστηκεν).—Of Christ Ro 1:5; 5:9, 17f, 21; 8:37; 2 Cor 1:20 al. (ASchettler, D. paulin. Formel ‘durch Christus’ 1907; GJonker, De paulin. formule ‘door Christus’: ThSt 27, 1909, 173–208).—Of the Holy Spirit Ac 11:28; 21:4; Ro 5:5.
    At times διά w. gen. seems to have causal mng. (Rdm. 142; POxy 299, 2 [I A.D.] ἔδωκα αὐτῷ διὰ σοῦ=because of you; Achilles Tat. 3, 4, 5 διὰ τούτων=for this reason; in Eng. cp. Coleridge, Anc. Mariner 135–36: Every tongue thro’ utter drouth Was wither’d at the root, s. OED s.v. ‘through’ I B 8) διὰ τῆς σαρκός because of the resistance of the flesh Ro 8:3.—2 Cor 9:13.—On the use of διά w. gen. in Ro s. Schlaeger, La critique radicale de l’épître aux Rom.: Congr. d’ Hist. du Christ. II 111f.
    B. w. acc.
    marker of extension through an area, through (Hom. and other early Gk. only in poetry, e.g. Pind. P. 9, 123 διʼ ὅμιλον ‘through the throng’; Hellenistic prose since Dionys. Hal. [JKäser, D. Präpositionen b. Dionys. Hal., diss. Erlangen 1915, 54]; ISyriaW 1866b τὸν πάτρωνα διὰ πάντα of the governor of a whole province) διήρχετο διὰ μέσον Σαμαρείας καὶ Γαλιλαίας Lk 17:11 (cp. SibOr 3, 316 ῥομφαία διελεύσεται διὰ μέσον σεῖο).
    marker of someth. constituting cause
    the reason why someth. happens, results, exists: because of, for the sake of (do something for the sake of a divinity: UPZ 62, 2 [161 B.C.] διὰ τὸν Σάραπιν; JosAs 1:10 διʼ αὐτήν; ApcSed 3:3 διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον; Tat. 8:2 διὰ τὸν … Ἄττιν; Ath. 30, 1 διὰ τὴν Δερκετώ) hated because of the name Mt 10:22; persecution arises because of teaching 13:21; because of unbelief vs. 58; because of a tradition 15:3; διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον (the sabbath was designed) for people Mk 2:27; because of Herodias Mk 6:17 (cp. Just. D. 34, 8 διὰ γυναῖκα); because of a crowd Lk 5:19; 8:19 al; because of Judeans Ac 16:3. διὰ τὸν θόρυβον 21:34; because of rain 28:2. Juristically to indicate guilt: imprisoned for insurrection and murder Lk 23:25. διʼ ὑμᾶς on your account=through your fault Ro 2:24 (Is 52:5). διὰ τὴν πάρεσιν because of the passing over 3:25 (but s. WKümmel, ZTK 49, ’52, 164). διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα on account of transgressions 4:25a (cp. Is 53:5; PsSol 13:5); but διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν in the interest of justification vs. 25b; s. 8:10 for a sim. paired use of διὰ. διὰ τὴν χάριν on the basis of the grace 15:15. διʼ ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκός because of a physical ailment (cp. POxy 726, 10f [II A.D.] οὐ δυνάμενος διʼ ἀσθένειαν πλεῦσαι. Cp. ἀσθένεια 1) Gal 4:13. διὰ τὸ θέλημα σου by your will Rv 4:11. διὰ τὸν χρόνον according to the time = by this time Hb 5:12 (Aelian, VH 3, 37 δ. τὸν χρ.=because of the particular time-situation).—W. words denoting emotions out of (Diod S 5, 59, 8 διὰ τὴν λύπην; 18, 25, 1 διὰ τὴν προπέτειαν=out of rashness; Appian, Celt. 1 §9 διʼ ἐλπίδα; 2 Macc 5:21; 7:20; 9:8; 3 Macc 5:32, 41; Tob 8:7): διὰ φθόνον out of envy Mt 27:18; Phil 1:15. διὰ σπλάγχνα ἐλέους out of tender mercy Lk 1:78. διὰ τ. φόβον τινός out of fear of someone J 7:13. διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην out of the great love Eph 2:4. διὰ τ. πλεονεξίαν in their greediness B 10:4.—Of God as the ultimate goal or purpose of life, whereas διά w. gen. (s. A4bβ above) represents God as Creator, Hb 2:10a (s. Norden, op. cit.; PGM 13, 76 διὰ σὲ συνέστηκεν … ἡ γῆ). Cp. J 6:57 (s. Bultmann ad loc.) PtK 2.
    in direct questions διὰ τί; why? (Hyperid. 3, 17; Dio Chrys. 20 [37], 28; Ael. Aristid. 31 p. 597 D.; oft. LXX; TestJob 37:8; TestLevi 2:9; GrBar, Tat; Mel., Fgm. 8b, 42) mostly in an interrogative clause Mt 9:11, 14; 13:10; 15:2f; 17:19; 21:25; Mk 2:18; 11:31; Lk 5:30; 19:23, 31; 20:5; 24:38; J 7:45; 8:43, 46; 12:5; 13:37; Ac 5:3; 1 Cor 6:7; Rv 17:7. Simply διὰ τί; (Hyperid. 3, 23) Ro 9:32; 2 Cor 11:11. Also διατί (always in t.r. and often by Tdf.; TestJob 46:2) B 8:4, 6; Hm 2:5; Hs 5, 5, 5. Kvan Leeuwen Boomkamp, Τι et Διατι dans les évangiles: RevÉtGr 39, 1926, 327–31.—In real and supposed answers and inferences διὰ τοῦτο therefore (X., An. 1, 7, 3; 7, 19; oft. LXX; JosAs 7:7; Ar. 12, 2; Just., A I, 44, 5 al.; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 3 Jac.) Mt 6:25; 12:27, 31; 13:13, 52; 14:2; 18:23; 21:43; 23:13 v.l.; 24:44; Mk 11:24; 12:24; Lk 11:19 al. Also διὰ ταῦτα (Epict.) Eph 5:6. διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι for this reason, (namely) that J 5:16, 18; 8:47; 10:17; 12:18, 39; 15:19; 1J 3:1. διὰ τοῦτο ἵνα for this reason, (in order) that (Lucian, Abdic. 1) J 1:31; 2 Cor 13:10; 1 Ti 1:16; Phlm 15. Also διὰ τοῦτο ὅπως Hb 9:15.
    διά foll. by inf. or acc. w. inf., representing a causal clause, because (Gen 39:9; Dt 1:36; 1 Macc 6:53; GrBar 8:4; Demetr.: 722 fgm 1:1 al.) διὰ τὸ μὴ ἔχειν βάθος because it had no depth Mt 13:5f; Mk 4:5f (διὰ τὸ μή w. inf.: X., Mem. 1, 3, 5; Hero Alex. I 348, 7; III 274, 19; Lucian, Hermot. 31); because lawlessness increases Mt 24:12; διὰ τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν ἐξ οἴκου Δ.. Lk 2:4; because it was built well 6:48 al. διὰ τὸ λέγεσθαι ὑπό τινων because it was said by some Lk 9:7 (for the constr. cp. Herodian 7, 12, 7 διὰ τὸ τὰς ἐξόδους ὑπὸ τ. πυρὸς προκατειλῆφθαι=because the exit-routes were blocked by the fire).
    instead of διά w. gen. to denote the efficient cause we may have διά, by
    α. w. acc. of thing (schol. on Pind., N. 4, 79a; 2 Macc 12:11; EpArist 77) διὰ τὸ αἷμα by the blood Rv 12:11. διὰ τὰ σημεῖα by the miracles 13:14.
    β. w. acc. of pers. and freq. as expr. of favorable divine action (Aristoph., Plut. 468; Dionys. Hal. 8, 33, 3, 1579 μέγας διὰ τ. θεούς ἐγενόμην; Ael. Aristid. 24, 1 K.=44 p. 824 D.: διʼ οὓς [= θεούς] ἐσώθην; SIG 1122; OGI 458, 40; PGM 13, 579 διῳκονομήθη τ. πάντα διὰ σέ; EpArist 292; Sir 15:11; 3 Macc 6:36: other exx. in SEitrem and AFridrichsen, E. christl. Amulett auf Pap. 1921, 24). ζῶ διὰ τὸν πατέρα J 6:57 (cp. PKöln VI, 245, 16 of Isis σὺ κυρεῖς τὰ πάντα, διὰ σὲ δʼ εἰσορῶ φαός ‘you are responsible for everything and thanks to you I can see light’). διὰ τὸν ὑποτάξαντα by the one who subjected it Ro 8:20.—DELG. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > διά

  • 18 VIÐ

    I)
    prep. with dat. and acc.
    I. with dat.
    hann sló honum niðr v. steininum, he dashed his head against the stone;
    hús liggja v. velli, the houses lie in ruins;
    kasta sér niðr v. velli, to cast oneself down on the ground;
    er inn efri kjöptr v. himni, en inn neðri við jörðu, the upper jaw touches the heaven, the lower the earth;
    hann hjó hann upp v. garðinum, he smote him close by the fence;
    skera af sér strenginn við øxinni, to cut the string, asunder against the axe;
    2) against, towards, of direction;
    horfa v. e-m, to look towards, face;
    3) along with (hann hafði marga smiðu v. sér);
    4) with, of an instrument (jarl hljóp upp v. sverði);
    5) among;
    gengu síðan í sæti sin v. öðrum mönnum, among other men;
    6) denoting barter, exchange, against, for (geta gull v. grjóti);
    7) denoting remedy, against (hjálpa e-m v. e-u);
    8) against, denoting contest, warding off (hafa liðsafla v. e-m);
    hafa (viz. afl) v. e-m, to be one’s match;
    9) ellipt. usages;
    stinga v. fótum, to stop;
    hrífa v., to catch hold;
    risa v., to withstand;
    hvatz hann fiðr v., whatsoever he may object;
    II. with acc.
    1) by, at, close to (sníða skeggit við hökuna);
    skjöldr við skjöld, shield to shield;
    v. Sandhólaferju, at Sandholferry;
    v. veginn, by the wayside;
    v. ána, by the river;
    draga segl v. hún, to hoist the sail to the top;
    festa e-n v. meið, tré, to fasten to a pole, tree;
    binda v. fót e-s, to bind up a broken leg;
    dró upp flóka v. austr, in the east;
    2) of time, towards, at;
    v. solar-setr, at sunset;
    v. sól, with the sun, at sunrise;
    v. aptan, towards evening;
    3) at, by (vera heima v. bú sitt);
    Hrútr var v. skip um sumarit, H. stayed by his ship during the summer;
    sitja v. stýri, to sit at the rudder;
    styðja sik v. e-t, to lean on;
    ganga v. staf, to walk with a staff;
    vera v. e-t, to be present at;
    sitja v. drykk, to sit at drink;
    í sýn v. bœinn, within sight of the town;
    5) denoting company, with (bauð þeim heim vill alla sína menn);
    v. annan, þriðja, fjórða mann, being two, three, four altogether;
    6) towards (a person or thing), respecting, regarding (mildr, blíðr, góðr v. e-n);
    til gæzlu v. e-n: for keeping, watching one;
    hræddr v. e-n, afraid of one;
    7) of cause, by, at;
    falla v. högg, to fall by a stroke;
    sigla v. stjörnuljós, to sail by starlight;
    verða reiðr v. e-t, to become wroth at;
    8) as compared with, set off against (þrjóta mun okkr illsku v. þik);
    eigi minna virðr en v. konunginn, of equal worth with the king;
    9) according to, after (gera klæði v. vöxt e-s);
    v. sik, in proportion;
    hann var skapaðr allr v. sik, well shaped, symmetrical;
    vita, hvat v. sik væri, to know what was the matter;
    10) denoting means, with, by (v. þessar fortölur);
    tendra eld v. e-t, to make fire by;
    11) ellipt. usages;
    bregða við, to start;
    hann þagði v., he remained silent;
    fá v. þrjú skip, to add three ships;
    þurfa v., to need;
    bjarga, hjálpa e-u v., to help, put right;
    koma e-u við, to bring about.
    (gen. -jar, pl. -jar), f. withy, withe; collar (viðjar af gulli).
    pers. pron. dual, we two.
    * * *
    1.
    f., gen. sing. viðjar, pl. viðjar, [Dan. vidje; Engl. withy; akin is víðir, q. v.]:— a withy or with; síðan var viðin ( a withy halter) dregin á hals honum, Fms. vii. 13 (see v. l.); þarmarnir urðu at viðu (sic) sterkri, Fas. iii. 34; ef röng eða viðjar slitna, Jb. 398; var enginn saumr í, en viðjar fyrir kné, of a boat, Fms. vii. 216; höggva tré til viðja, K. Þ. K. 88; viðjar af gulli ok silfri, on a dog, Hkr. i. 136, Fas. iii. 45; tún-svín þat er hringr, knappr eða við sé í rana, Grág. ii. 232; stjórn-við, the ‘rudder-withy,’ the strap in which the paddle-like rudder moved, like the ζευκτηρίαι in Act. Apost. xxvii. 40.
    2.
    pron. pers. dual (= vit), we two (see ek C); this spelling, which is also that of the oldest vellums, answers to the mod. pronunciation, passim: in mod. usage it has quite taken the place of the old plur. vér.
    3.
    prep., also used ellipt. without its case, or simply as an adverb; við is a curtailed form of viðr, which latter form remains in a few compds, even in mod. usage, thus, viðr-eign, viðr-kenna, viðr-nefni, viðr-lífi, viðr-væri; when found singly, við is the common form in Icel.; but as in MSS. it is commonly abbreviated, v̾, the two forms are hardly distinguishable; við, however, is received as the usual form, viðr being more freq. in Norse vellums, and in some later Icel. vellums imitating the Norse spelling: [Goth. wiþra = πρός; A. S. wider; cp. Scot. wither-shins; O. H. G. widar; Germ. wieder; but Engl. with; Dan. ved; Swed. wäd]:—against, towards, etc.
    WITH DAT.
    A. Against, denoting a leaning or resting on, striking against, or the like; hann hjó hann upp við garðinum, smote him standing against the wall, Nj. 120; stinga höndum við berginu, Symb. 59; ganga við brekkunni, up-hill, against the hill, cp. Lat. adversus montem, Valla L. 212; skjóta við honum skildinum, Fms. i. 44; ljósta skildi við kesjunni, Eg. 378; hann spyrndi við svá fast … spyrna við grunni, Edda 36; kasta sér niðr við vellinum, Nj. 58; leggja e-n við velli, Boll. 344; slá honum niðr við steininum, dashed his head against the stone, Finnb. 292; hann drap hann við borðinu, Korm. 236; hjó af honum höfuð við stokkinum, Fas. ii. 285; ok lagði (þá) við stokki, Am. 73; hús liggja við velli, lie down in ruins, Fms. iii. 144; er hinn efri kjöptr við himni enn hinn neðri við jörðu, the upper jaw touching the heaven, the lower the earth, Edda 41; skera af sér strenginn við öxinni, rubbing it against the axe, Nj. 136; vóru segl hans at sjá við hafi, the sails were seen out at sea, far in the offing, Fas. ii. 403.
    II. against, towards, of direction; gapa við tunglinu, Fas. iii. 622; horfa við e-m, to look towards, face, Eg. 293; horfa baki við e-m, Hkr. iii. 384; líta við e-m, Nj. 132, Fms. i. 125, vii. 314; horfa vid landi, A.A. 24; snúa baki við e-m, Fas. i. 296; snúask við e-m, Hkr. ii. 120.
    III. along with, with, denoting company; hann hafði við sér harpara einn, Str. 57; hann hafði marga smiðu við sér, Fms. ix. 377; fór Margaðr ok Guthormr við honum, Hkr. iii. 113; at Ástríðr mundi vera við feðr sínum, i. 188; er hér ok Sigurðr við jarli, Fms. ix. 327; hann var þar upp fæddr við henni, x. 421; bjóðum vér þér við Hákoni þangat, ix. 252; ferr heim við sínum mönnum, Rd. 312; fór hann við liði sínu, Hkr. iii. 44; við hundrað skipum, Fas. i. 461; gengr síðan í sæti sín við oðrum mönnum, Fms. x. 17; bað biskup ríða við sér (= með sér), 6.
    2. with, of an instrument; jarl hljóp upp við sverði, Fms. ix. 340; sjau menn við vápnum, viii. 14; gengu tveir menn við merkjum, x. 15: the phrase, eiga, ala, geta barn við kouu, Grág., Fms. i. 113, iii. 110, Ld. 102, Eg. 31; merrin fékk við þeim hesti, Landn. 195.
    3. spec. usages; við góðum vinskap, Boll. 362; halda vináttu við föstum trúnaði, Fms. ix. 375; at þær sagnir muni vera við sannindum, true, viii. 6; at berjask við honum eðr við honum lífit láta, ix. 332; fara við herskildi … eyða land við eldi, x. 134; ausa e-t við moldu, Hkr. i. 220; skipuðu mörgum hlutum við (with, among) sínum mönnum, Fms. x. 91; gengu síðan í sæti sín við öðrum mönnum, among other men, 17; skreiðask fram við (= með) landinu, viii. 437.
    4. = ok, with, together with; Þórr við Grimni = Th. and G., Hallfred; höfuð við hjarta, head and heart, Kormak.
    B. METAPH. USAGES:
    I. denoting barter, exchange, against, for (like Gr. ἀντί); gefa gull við grjóti, Fas. iii. 45; selja við verði, Fms. i. 80; seldu mik við hleifi, Hm.; við litlu verði, Eg. 100; við fémútu, Nj. 215; meta e-t við silfri, Fms. x. 5; gefa margra manna líf við yðvarri þrályndi, iv. 194.
    2. denoting remedy, against; beiti við bit-sóttum en við bölvi rúnar, Hm. 140; hjálpa e-m við e-u, to help against, passim.
    II. against, denoting contest, warding off, withstanding; hafa afla við e-m, Lv. 43; hafa liðs-afla, liðs-kost við e-m, Ld. 372, Hkr. i. 272: ellipt., hafa (viz. afi) við e-m, to be one’s match, Lv. 109; þótti sem engi mundi hafa við þeim í vígi, Nj. 89; eg hefi ekki við þér, I cannot lift with (i. e. am no match for) thee; ábyrgjask e-t við e-u, Grág. ii. 216, 364; forða e-m við háska, Edda i. 116; halda þá við ágangi Hákonar, Fms. i. 224; varðveita e-n við e-u, Grág.; ekki hélzk við þeim, Eg. 125; rísa við e-m, Sturl. ii. 119; vera búinn, van-búinn við e-m, Ld. 324; sat hann þar við áhlaupum Dana, Fms. i. 28; vinna við sköpum, Fas. i. 199; sporna við e-u, göra við e-u, see göra, sporna; ef þat nemr við förinni, Ld. 70 (see nema A.I. 7, 8); mæla við e-u, Hkr. ii. 198; tölðu allir við förinni, Greg. 28; setja hug sinn við e-u, Fms. x. 232; kveða nei við e-u, Sturl. i. 27; drepa hendi við e-u, Hkr. ii. 164; reiðask við e-u, Nj. 182; e-m ríss hugr við e-u, Fas. i. 30; mér býðr við e-u, to loathe; sjá við e-u, to shun; varna við e-u, to beware of; vera hætt við e-u, in danger of, Ísl. ii. 262; ú-hætt við e-u, safe, Landn. 319.
    III. with verbs;liggja við e-u, to lie on the verge of; honum lá við falli, Fas. iii. 261; búið við skipbroti, Ísl. ii. 245; honum var við andhlaupi, Eg. 553; sjá, horfa, líta … við e-u, to look towards; taka við e-u, to receive; búask við e-u, to prepare for, expect, Ld. 106; verða vel, ílla, við e-u, to behave well, ill, on some occasion; komask við veðri, see veðr.
    IV. ellipt. usages; þeir snerusk þá við, turned round, facing, Nj. 245; hón drap við hendi, Lv. 38; hann laust við atgeirinum, Nj. 84.; hann stakk við forkinum, Eg. 220; hann stakk við fótum, stopped, Finnb. 300; hrífa við, to catch hold, Bs. i. 197, 423, Gísl. 125; búask við, to make oneself ready; göra við, to resist; rísa við, to withstand, Fs.; at ek bjóða við tvenn verð, Ld. 146; hvatz hinn fiðr við, whatsoever he may object, Nj. 99; taka við, to begin where another stops; þú skalt gefa mér við ( in return) verjuna, Fbr.
    WITH ACC.
    A. By, at, close to:
    I. denoting proximity; skjöldr við skjöld, shield to shield, in a row, Nj. 125; skip við skip, Ó. H. (in a verse); samnask hlutr við hlut, Rb. 108; hálsinn við herðarnar, Ld. 40; sníða skeggið við hökuna, Eg. 564; við bryggju-sporðinn, Fms. i. 14; grafa barn við kirkju-garð út, K. Þ. K.; uppi við fjallit, Eg. 137; við Sandhóla-ferju, Nj. 29; við vaðit, 83; við veginn, by the way-side, Fb. ii. 330; hér við ána, by the river, Ld. 46; búa við Þjórsá, Nj. 93; liggja við land, Fms. i. 14; við Ísland, Grág.; binda stein við hálsinn, Ld. 154; draga segl við hún, hoist sail to the top, Hkr. ii. 6; reka spora við eyra e-m, Nj. 82; festa e-n við meið, tré, to fasten to a pole, a tree, Glúm. 391; nísta við gólfit, to pin it to the floor (see nista); binda við fót e-s, to bind up a broken leg, Bárð. 167; dró upp flóka við austr, in the east, Vígl. 22.
    2. temporal, towards, at; við vetr sjálfan, Fms. ii. 97; Krók. 51 C; við sólar-setr, Fas. i. 514; við sól, with the sun, at sunrise. Eg. 717; við aptan, towards evening, Grág. (Kb.) ii. 143; við þat sjálft, at that moment, Fms. xi. 432; bregða í kross við hvert orð, at every word, K. Þ. K.; vera við aldr, to be stricken in years, Eb. 18, Ísl. ii. 192, Fms. ii. 81; ef barn er við dauða, on the point to die, N. G. L. i. 345; við sjálft, on the verge of (see sjálfr); við váða sjálfan, búið við geig, on the verge of, Eg. 158; Grettir var við svefn, just asleep, Grett. 127.
    3. phrases, við svá búit, after all done, often with the notion of ‘in vain, nothing having been done’ (búa B. II. δ); fóru við þat heim, Fms. i. 54, ix. 469, Nj. 127; skildu við þetta, 260, Ísl. ii. 217.
    II. at, to; Hrútr er við skip, Nj. 4; Hrútr var við búð, 79; vera heima við bú sitt, 215; hanga upp við siglu-rá, Fas. iii. 659; bundinn við staf, Eg. 232; fastr við altara, fastened to the altar, Vm. 110; styðja sik vid e-t, to lean on, Fms. ix. 512; sitja upp við hægindit, leaning on it, Ld. 16; sitja upp við vegginn, Nj. 153; ganga við staf, 219; ganga við tréfót, Eb. 66; styðjask við höndina, Fas. i. 228; rísa upp við olboga, Þórð. 15; sitja við stýri, at the rudder, Eg. 385; hafa barn við brjóst, to have a bairn at breast, N. G. L. i. 340; leggja, bæta, auka, við e-t, to add to; blanda við e-t, to mix with; vera við e-t, to be present at, Ld. 92, Eg. 540; sitja við drykk, mat, to sit at drink, meat, Eg. 303, 420.
    III. denoting association, together with; vera samþingi, samfjórðungs við e-n, Grág. ii. 237; vera saman við e-n, vera samvista við e-n, eiga samneyti við, vera sammæðr við e-n, passim; vera utan-fjórðungs við víg, Grág. ii. 89; vera við e-t riðinn; þeir vildu eigi vera hér við heiðna menn, Íb. 4; búa við e-n, Gísl. 17.
    2. direction; í sýn við bæinn, Fas. ii. 507; í örskots-helgi við garðinn, Grág.; standa í höggfæri við e-n, Nj. 97; við þat lík at lifa, Hm.
    IV. denoting company, with; bauð þeim heim við alla sína menn, Vígl. 27; riðu við sextigi manna, Nj. 10, 213, Ld. 164; gékk á land við einn svein, Fms. ix. 502; sækja land við útlendan her, Hkr. i. 198; við fá, marga … menn, Fas. i. 35; the phrase, við annan, þriðja fjórða … mann (see annarr I. 1); þú ert hér kominn við svá mikit fé, Ld. 112; sækja mál við níu búa, Grág.; við váttorð, Kb. i. 103; leyfa e-t við vitni, Ld. 104; bjóða e-t við váttorð, in the presence of, by witnesses, Nj. 243.
    B. METAPH. USAGES:
    I. towards a person or thing, respecting, regarding; hryðja við aðilja, Grág. (Kb.) i. 127; missa fjár síns við þjóf, Grág.; skilja við e-n, to part with (see skilja); til metnaðar við sik, Edda i. 20; til huggunar við sik, Ld. 228; til þjónustu við e-n, Eg. 28; til gæzlu við e-n, for keeping, watching one, Ld. 152; ganga, koma, fara til fundar, til móts … við e-n, 62, 90, Nj. 4, Eg. 101; mildr, blíðr, léttr, kátr, ástúðigr, góðr, harðr, grimmr, reiðr, harðráðr, stríðr, … við menn, mild … towards, Nj. 2, 47, 48; víkjast undan við e-n, Ld. 42; fyrir kapps sakir við e-n, til liðveizlu, hjálpar … við e-n, Eg. 44, Nj. 75; sýna vinskap, halda vinskap við e-n, Ld. 150; leggja ást við e-n, 34; líka vel, ílla við e-n, Nj. 53; eiga eyrindi við e-n, Eg. 260; eiga orð við e-n, 255; hafa lög við e-n, Nj. 106; tala, mæla, ræða, segja, spjalla við e-n, to talk, speakwith a person, passim; skipta, eiga, … við e-n, to deal… with; berjask, deila við e-n, to fight with, against; göra e-t við e-n, so to act with, Greg. 43; reyna e-t við e-n, to contend with one, Nj. 46, 94, Edda i. 106; hafa misgört við e-n, Fms. viii. 103; láta vaxa óþokka við e-n, Nj. 107; tilför við Gunuar, 101; mála-tilbúnaðr við e-n, 100; sekr við e-n, útlagr við goða, Grág.
    2. hræddr við e-n, afraid of one; verða varr við e-t, to perceive; vanr við e-t, used to a thing; hann var svá vanr við vini sína, Fms. viii. 220; fella sik við e-t, kunna við e-t, to apply oneself to, to like.
    II. of cause, by, at; falla við högg, to fall by a stroke, Nj. 163; hrata við lagit, Eg. 379; vakna við e-t, Fas. ii. 116; vakna við draum; verða glaðr, reiðr, hryggr, úkátr … við e-t, to become glad, wroth … at, Íb. 10, Eg. 102, 321, passim; bregða sér við e-t, Ld. 190: by, við minn atbeina, Fms. vi. 66; við samþykki e-s, Eg. 165; við ráð e-s, Grág. (Kb.) ii. 30; gört þat við einræði þitt, Ld. 188; et þat at vánum við skaplyndi Þorgeirs, Nj. 255; hlaða seglum við mikinn háska, with great danger, Korm. 168; sigla við stjörnu-ljós, to sail by star-light, Fms. i. 24; lesa við ljós, to read with a light; búa sik við skart, to dress fine.
    III. as compared with, set off against; sex sær við kú, Grág. i. 502–504; selja, virðing sína við íllgirni þínaa, Eb. 160; þrjóta mun mik íllsku við þik. Hkr. i. 322; mik skortir við hann, Nj. 90; hafa afta við e-n, Eg. 187; eigi minna virðr enn við konunginn, i. e. of equal worth with the king, Fms. xi. 45; er þetta við mikla fémuni, Hrafn. 19; fjórðungi skerð við goðorð önnur, Grág. (Kb.) i. 211; Skotland er þriðjungr ríkis við England, Nj. 266; þriðjung við liðsmenn, Eg. 57; at þriðjungi við ykkr, Ld. 102; helming við hann, Fms. i. 22; gaf þeim hálfar tekjur við sik, 7.
    IV. við þann kost, on that condition, Grág. (Kb.) i. 233: of medicine, for, við svefnleysi, við orms-bit, við offeitan kvið …, Lækn.: in mod. usage dat., and so in Hm. 138.
    V. denoting fitness, proportion; göra klæði við vöxt e-s, Eg. 516; við þeirra hæfi, 109; er þat ekki við þitt æði, Ld. 298; vera við alþýðu-skap, Fs. 63; við sik, in proportion, B. K. 8; neyta skógar við sik sem þarf, Grág. ii. 292; þat er hann má eigi sjálfr við sik njóta, himself alone, 623. 21; hann var skapaðr allr við sik, well shaped, symmetrical, Fas. i. 173; fagrt ok allt vel við sik, Fms. x. 321; veðrit vesnaði en nátt-myrkr á við sik. Bjarn. 52; vita hvat við sik væri, to know what was the matter, Fms. xi. 11, Fas. ii. 516; leggja mál við tré, Ld. 316; draga kvarða við lérept, vaðmál, Grág. i. 497, 498.
    VI. with, by, denoting means; tendra eld við fjallrapa, to light fire with, Bs. i. 7; við þessar fortölur, Ld. 204; kom svá við umtölur góðra manna, Nj. 267; við áskoran þína, 258; mýkjask við e-t, Fms. v. 239; húð skorpnuð við eld, Nj. 208.
    VII. with verbs; lifa við skömm, meizlur, harm, lifa við slíka harma, to live with or in shame, sorrow, Nj. 92, Hkr. ii. 107, Eg. 604, Ld. 332; leika við e-n, Nj. 2; kaupa við e-n, Grág.; binda við e-t, to bind, fasten to; sætta, rægja, friða e-n við e-n, Eg. 226, Grág. ii. 99; tala, … við e-n, to speak, deal … with, Nj. 2, 197, Ld. 22 (see I); hefja upp bónorð við e-n, Eg. 38; leita eptir við e-n, leita ráða við e-n, eiga hlut at við e-n, Nj. 75, 101, 213, Eg. 174; fæða, lifa, fæðask, ala, búa, bjargast, við e-t, to feed, live, subsist … on, Edda i. 46, Fms. i. 226, v. 219, Nj. 236, passim; vera við e-t, to be present at, and metaph. to enjoy, Hom. 87, Edda (pref.); nema lyfsteinn sé við riðinn, Ld. 250; hann brá upp við fætinum (viz. við lagit), Nj. 264; binda við e-t, to bind to, Fms. ix. 358; at þeim heimilum ok í örskotshelgi við (viz. þau) á alla vega, Grág. (Kb.) i. 88; þar við, hér við, at engi mundi þar þora við at etja, Nj. 89.
    2. hagr við e-t, skilful at; kunna vel við e-t, id.; skjarr við skot, Ls.; temja, venja, … við e-t; drekka við sleitur (see sleita); kveða við raust, Sturl. iii. 317, Eg. 554; syngja vid tón, Sturl. iii. 210; búa sik við skart, skikkja búin við gull, Fms. x. 199; skyrta saumuð við gull, embroidered with, Fas. ii. 529; glóa við gull, to glow or gleam with gold, Lex. Poët.
    VIII. elliptical or ad- verbial usages; bregða við, to start; hann þagði við, remained silent, Nj. 2; verða bilt, felmt við, Ísl. ii. 274, Nj. 105; fá við þrjú skip, to add three ships, Fms. xi. 73; jók nú miklu við, it waxed much, Ld. 54; kveða við, gella við, to scream, yell; þurfa við, to need, Nj. 74; njóta e-s við, to enjoy, 85; komask við, to be touched; leita við, to try; bera við, to happen (see bera); koma við, to touch; standa, bíða við, to stop a bit; nema við, to hinder, cause a hindrance; kunna við, to like; koma e-u við, to bring a thing about, 101; ef ek viðr um kæmumk, if I could manage it, Hbl.; bjarga e-u við, hjálpa við, to help, put right; reisa við, rétta við, to raise up again, put right; kannask við, to recognise; vera við staddr, to be present, = við e-t staddr.
    IX. in recipr. phrases, talask við, eigask við, fásk við, etc., to speakto one another, where the object is suffixed to the preceding verb.
    X. with an adverb or particle, of direction; upp á við, niðr á við, upwards, downwards; vestr á við, Fas. ii. 244; móts við, towards; á við, equivalent to (það er á við tvær merkr); austan við, vestan við, sunnan við, fram við, inn við, etc., followed by an accusative.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > VIÐ

  • 19 tête

    n. f.
    1. Avoir la tête de l'emploi (iron.): To 'look the part'. Les croque-morts n'ontpas toujours la tête de l'emploi, c'est souvent des rigolos! Undertakers aren't always the mournful buggers we expect them to be!
    2. Faire une drôle de tête: To look sour and discontented. Faire la tête à quelqu'un: To sulk.
    3. Faire la mauvaise tête: To be 'pig-headed', to be obstreperous and reluctant to comply.
    4. Avoir ses têtes: To 'have one's (little) favourites', to let oneself be ruled by likes and dislikes where relationships at work are concerned.
    5. Avoir une tête à coucher dehors avec un billet de logetnent: To have an 'ugly mug', to have an unattractive face (in fact, to have the kind of features that would even get you turned a way from a welfare hostel).
    6. Faire un prix à la tête du client: To quote a price according to the likely means of a customer. Au garage, lesprix sont un peu à la tête du client! If you drive a Rolls, they'll charge the earth for repairs!
    7. Tête de pipe: Portrait-photograph. J'ai vu sa tête de pipe dans le canard! I've seen his mug somewhere in a paper!
    8. Tête de¼! (insult intensifier): You bloody¼! Tête de courge, va! You blithering idiot!
    9. Tête de lard (also: tête de cochon, tête de mule): Pig-headed character.
    10. Affaire tête de lard (pol.): Dead-end enquiry, one where witnesses and accused alike make the police's job more arduous by refusing to co-operate.
    11. Se payer la tête de quelqu'un: To 'take the piss out of someone', to 'take the mickey', to poke fun at someone.
    12. Etre tombé sur la tête: To be 'bonkers', 'potty', to be mad. T'es tombé sur la tête, quoi?! You crazy in the head?!
      a To 'take a header', to dive into the water.
      b (fig.): To 'go under', to become bankrupt.
    14. Petite tête! (jocular form of address): Salut, petite tête! Mornin' mate! Alors, comment ça va, petite tête?! Well, how's tricks?!
    15. Cause à mon cul, ma tête est malade! (sarcastic retort): 'Get knotted'—I don't want to hear what you've got to say!
    16. La tête et lesjambes: The combination of brains and brawn. (The expression courir avec la tête et les jambes originates from the racing cyclist's slang and refers to competitors who use critical judgement when exerting physical effort. In the 1960s, a television quiz-cum-competition with that name teamed up scholars and sportsmen to compete for prizes.)
    17. Tenir la tête (Gambling slang): To act as judge and arbiter at the tables. (August Le Breton in his L 'ARGOT CHEZ LES VRAIS DE VRAI explains that this 'refereeing' activity is often given to a 'cleaned-out' player by a gambling baron; the position carries a small commission on stakes.)
    18. Tête d'oreiller (corr. taie d'oreiller): Pillowcase.

    Dictionary of Modern Colloquial French > tête

  • 20 טעי

    טעי, טָעָה(b. h.) 1) (cmp. תָּעָה) to err, be mistaken. Ber.II, 3 קרא וט׳ יחזור למקום שט׳ if in reading the Shma one made a mistake, he must go back to the passage in which he made a mistake. B. Mets.63b בכדי שהדעת טוֹעָה within the limits of a reasonable mistake in counting. Snh.33b ט׳ בדבר שהצדוקיןוכ׳ if the judge made a mistake in a case in which there is no difference of opinion between the Sadducees and Pharisees. Ib. 6a, a. e. ט׳ בדבר משנה if the judge gave a wrong decision against an explicit law in the Mishnah; ט׳ בשיקול הדעת, v. דַּעַת; a. fr. 2) to seek, to miss (cmp. טָעַן I). Taan.III, 8 אבן הטוֹעִים; B. Mets.28b אבן טוֹעִין Ms. M. (ed. טוֹעַן, v. Rabb. D. S. a. l. note), v. אֶבֶןLev. R. s. 13, beg. אני טָעִיתִי את ההלכה I had forgotten the law in the case. Hif. הִטְעָה to lead astray, to deceive, disappoint. B. Mets.VI, 1 הִטְעוּ זה את זה they deceived one another, i. e. the agent employed to engage laborers did not act according to instruction, v. next w.M. Kat. II, 1 הִטְעוּהוּ פועלים hired men disappointed him. Gen. R. s. 19 end (interpret, hishshiani, Gen. 3:13) הִטְעַנִי he deceived me with false promises; a. e. Hof. הוּטְעָה to be led astray, be deceived. Tanḥ. Balak 5 כמו שהטעהה׳ as he led astray, so was he led astray.Part. מוּטְעֶה, f. מוּטַעַת, מוּטְעֵית misled, brought about by mistake, under false premises. Yeb.106a חליצה מ׳ a ḥălitsah to which the yabam consented in consequence of a deception (a promise not kept); Tosef. ib. XII, 13; Keth.74a.R. Hash. 25a אתםאפי׳ מוּטָעִין ‘ye (shall appoint), even if deceived by witnesses (your decision stands). Sabb.101b מוטעין (mattings fastened, or spread) by mistake; a. e.

    Jewish literature > טעי

См. также в других словарях:

  • The Accused (1988 film) — The Accused Theatrical release poster Directed by Jonathan Kaplan Produced by Stanley …   Wikipedia

  • The Seal of Confession —     The Law of the Seal of Confession     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Law of the Seal of Confession     In the Decretum of the Gratian who compiled the edicts of previous councils and the principles of Church law which he published about 1151,… …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Bunker — is an account, written by American journalist James P. O Donnell, of the history of the Führerbunker in early 1945, as well as the last days of German dictator Adolf Hitler. It was first published in 1978.With works by Hugh Trevor Roper and… …   Wikipedia

  • The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints — Classification Latter Day Saint movement Theology Nontrinitarian, Mormonism Governance …   Wikipedia

  • The Blessed Virgin Mary —     The Blessed Virgin Mary     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Blessed Virgin Mary     The Blessed Virgin Mary is the mother of Jesus Christ, the mother of God.     In general, the theology and history of Mary the Mother of God follow the… …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Sacrament of Penance —     The Sacrament of Penance     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Sacrament of Penance     Penance is a sacrament of the New Law instituted by Christ in which forgiveness of sins committed after baptism is granted through the priest s absolution to… …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The public scandal of the Dreyfus Affair — The scandal over falsely accused Alfred Dreyfus grew into a public scandal of unprecedented scale. Almost the entire french nation became divided between pro and anti Dreyfusards.Attitude of the pressAgainst this odious campaign was set in motion …   Wikipedia

  • The Pope —     The Pope     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Pope     (Ecclesiastical Latin papa from Greek papas, a variant of pappas father, in classical Latin pappas Juvenal, Satires 6:633).     The title pope, once used with far greater latitude (see below …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Door Within Trilogy — is a set of three novels written by American author Wayne Thomas Batson describing the adventures of teenager Aidan Thomas through the Realm , a world correlated to ours. The titles of the books are The Door Within , The Rise of the Wyrm Lord ,… …   Wikipedia

  • The Miracle of the Sun — is an alleged miraculous event witnessed by as many as 100,000 people on 13 October 1917 in the Cova da Iria fields near Fátima, Portugal. Those in attendance had assembled to observe what the Portuguese secular newspapers had been ridiculing for …   Wikipedia

  • The Incarnation —     The Incarnation     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Incarnation     I. The Fact of the Incarnation     (1) The Divine Person of Jesus Christ     A. Old Testament Proofs     B. New Testament Proofs     C. Witness of Tradition     (2) The Human… …   Catholic encyclopedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»